675444
110
Zoom out
Zoom in
Previous page
1/310
Next page
Renault KADJAR
Vehicle user manual
A passion
for
performance
ELF, partner of
RENAULT recommends ELF
Partners in cutting-edge automotive technology, Elf and Renault combine their expertise on both
the racetrack and the city streets. This enduring partnership gives drivers a range of lubricants
perfectly suited to Renault cars. Lasting protection and optimum performance for your engine –
guaranteed. Whether changing the oil or simply topping up, to find the approved ELF lubricant
best suited to your vehicle, ask your Renault dealer for a recommendation or consult your vehi-
cle maintenance handbook.
www.lubricants.elf.com
A brand from
2016-Elf-ENG.indd 1 18/05/2016 14:20
0.1
Translated from French. Copying or translation, in part or in full, is forbidden unless prior written permission has been obtained from the car manufacturer.
Welcome to your new vehicle
The descriptions of the models given in this handbook are based on the technical specifications at the time of writing. This hand-
book covers all items of equipment (both standard and optional) available for these models but whether or not these are
fitted to the vehicle depends on the version, options selected and the country where the vehicle is sold.
This handbook may also contain information about items of equipment to be introduced later in the model year.
Enjoy driving your new vehicle.
This drivers handbook contains the information necessary:
for you to familiarise yourself with your vehicle, to use it to its best advantage and to benefit fully from the all the functions and
the technical developments it incorporates.
to ensure that it always gives the best performance by following the simple, but comprehensive advice concerning regular main-
tenance.
to enable you to deal quickly with minor faults not requiring specialist attention.
It is well worth taking a few minutes to read this handbook to familiarise yourself with the information and guidelines it contains
about the vehicle and its functions and new features. If certain points are still unclear, our Network technicians will be only too
pleased to provide you with any additional information.
To help you, you will find the following symbols:
and These appear in the vehicle and indicate that you should consult the manual for detailed information and/or
limits on operations with respect to your vehicle’s equipment.
anywhere in the manual indicates a hazard, danger or a safety recommendation.
0.2
0.3
Getting to know your vehicle ...............................
Driving ...................................................................
Your comfort .........................................................
Maintenance .........................................................
Practical advice ....................................................
Technical specifications ......................................
Alphabetical index ...............................................
Sections
1
CONTENTS
2
3
4
5
6
7
0.4
1.1
Section 1: Getting to know your vehicle
Key, radio frequency remote control: general information, use, deadlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2
RENAULT card: General information, use, deadlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.6
Locking, unlocking the opening elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.13
Opening and closing the doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.16
Automatic locking when driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.18
Headrests - Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.19
Seat belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.23
Additional methods of restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.27
in addition to the front seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.27
to the rear seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.31
side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.32
Child safety: General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.34
Choosing a child seat mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.37
Fitting a child seat, general information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.39
Child seats: attachment by seat belt or by Isofix system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.41
Deactivating/activating the front passenger airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.47
Driving position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.50
Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.54
Trip computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.62
vehicle settings customisation menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.72
Steering wheel/Power-assisted steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.74
Clock and outdoor temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.75
Rear view mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.76
Exterior lighting and signals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.78
Audible and visual signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.84
Headlight beam adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.85
Washers, wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.87
Fuel tank (filling with fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.95
Reagent tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.98
1.2
1 Locks all the opening elements.
2 Unlocks all the opening elements.
3 Ignition and front door key.
4 Locking/unlocking the tailgate only.
Remote control with switchblade
key:
5 Locking/unlocking using the switch-
blade key. To release the insert from
its housing, press button 5, it comes
out automatically. Press button 5 and
guide the insert back into its housing.
KEY, RADIO FREQUENCY REMOTE CONTROL: general information (1/2)
The key must not be used for any
function other than those described
in the handbook (removing the cap
from a bottle, etc.).
Advice
Avoid leaving the remote control in
hot, cold or humid areas.
Drivers responsibility
when parking or stopping
the vehicle
Never leave an animal,
child or adult who is not self-suffi-
cient alone on your vehicle, even for
a short time.
They may pose a risk to themselves
or to others by starting the engine,
activating equipment such as the
electric windows or locking the
doors.
Also, in hot and/or sunny weather,
please remember that the tempera-
ture inside the passenger compart-
ment increases very quickly.
RISK OF DEATH OR SERIOUS
INJURY.
5
1
2
3
4
1.3
KEY, RADIO FREQUENCY REMOTE CONTROL: general information (2/2)
Radio frequency remote
control operating range
This varies according to the surround-
ings: take care not to lock or unlock the
doors by inadvertently pressing the but-
tons on the remote control.
Note: If a door or the boot is open or
not closed properly, the doors and boot
lock/unlock in quick succession.
Interference
Interference by factors in the immediate
vicinity (external installations or the use
of equipment operating on the same
frequency as the remote control) may
affect the operation of the remote con-
trol.
Replacement and additional keys
or remote controls.
You must only contact an approved
dealer:
– If you need to replace a key it will
be necessary to take the vehicle
and all of its keys to an approved
Dealer in order to initialise the
system.
Depending on the vehicle, you
have the option of using up to
four remote controls.
Remote control unit failure
Make sure that the correct battery
type is being used, and that the
battery is in good condition and in-
serted correctly. These batteries
have a service life of approximately
two years.
Refer to Section 5: “Radio fre-
quency remote control: batteries”
for the battery changing procedure.
1.4
Locking/unlocking only the
boot
Press the button 3.
RADIO FREQUENCY REMOTE CONTROL UNIT: use
The remote control A can be used to
lock or unlock the doors and boot.
It is powered by a battery which must
be replaced (refer to the information on
“Radio frequency remote control: bat-
teries” in Section 5).
Locking the doors
Press locking button 1.
The side indicator lights and hazard
warning lights flash twice to indicate
that the doors have been locked.
If a door or the boot is open or not prop-
erly shut, they will lock and unlock in
quick succession and the hazard warn-
ing lights and indicator lights will not
flash.
Unlocking the doors
Pressing button 2 unlocks the doors
and tailgate.
The side indicator lights and hazard
warning lights flash once to indicate
that the doors have been unlocked.
1
3
A
2
Note:
With the engine running, the ignition
switched on and in accessories position
(refer to “Ignition switch: vehicles with a
key” in Section 2), the remote control
buttons will be inactive.
Drivers responsibility when parking or stopping the vehicle
Never leave an animal, child or adult who is not self-sufficient alone on
your vehicle, even for a short time.
They may pose a risk to themselves or to others by starting the engine,
activating equipment such as the electric windows or locking the doors.
Also, in hot and/or sunny weather, please remember that the temperature inside
the passenger compartment increases very quickly.
RISK OF DEATH OR SERIOUS INJURY.
1.5
RADIO FREQUENCY REMOTE CONTROL UNIT: deadlocking
Never use deadlocking if
someone is still inside the
vehicle.
If the vehicle is equipped with a dead-
locking function, this allows you to lock
the opening elements and to prevent
the doors from being unlocked using
the interior handles (for example, by
breaking the window and then trying to
open the door from the inside).
To activate deadlocking
Press button 1 twice in quick succes-
sion.
The hazard warning lights and indicator
lights give two slow flashes and three
quick flashes to indicate locking.
Special note: deadlocking is not pos-
sible if the hazard warning lights or the
side lights are lit.
1
To deactivate deadlocking
Unlock the vehicle using button 2.
The hazard warning lights flash once
to indicate that the doors have been un-
locked.
2
1.6
RENAULT CARD: general information (1/2)
The RENAULT card is used
for:
locking/unlocking the doors and boot
(see the following pages);
switching on the vehicle lighting re-
motely (refer to the following pages);
starting the engine; refer to the in-
formation on “Starting the engine” in
Section 2.
Battery life
Make sure that the correct battery type
is being used, and that the battery is in
good condition and inserted correctly.
Its service life is approximately two
years: replace it when the message
“Keycard battery low” appears on the
instrument panel (refer to the informa-
tion on the “RENAULT card: battery” in
section 5).
RENAULT card operating
range
This varies according to the surround-
ings. It is important to make sure when
handling the RENAULT card that you
do not lock or unlock the doors by inad-
vertently pressing the buttons.
When the battery is flat, you can
still lock/unlock and start your vehi-
cle. Please see the information on
“Locking and unlocking the doors”
in Chapter 1 and “Starting, stopping
the engine” in Chapter 2.
1
2
3
4
1 Unlocking the doors and tailgate.
2 Locking all doors and tailgate.
3 Unlocking/locking the boot.
4 Switching on the lighting remotely.
1.7
RENAULT CARD: general information (2/2)
Advice
Avoid leaving the card in hot, cold or
humid areas.
Do not keep the RENAULT card in
a place where it could be bent or
damaged accidentally, such as in a
back pocket of a garment.
Replacement: need for an
additional RENAULT Card
If you lose your RENAULT card or
require another, you can obtain one
from an approved dealer.
If a RENAULT card is replaced, it
will be necessary to take the vehi-
cle and all of its RENAULT cards
to an approved dealer to initialise
the system.
You may use up to four RENAULT
cards per vehicle.
Distance lighting function
Pressing button 4 switches on the
dipped beam headlights and the interior
lighting for approximately 20 seconds.
This can be used, for example, to iden-
tify the vehicle from a distance when
parked in a car park.
Note: Pressing button 4 again switches
off the lighting.
4
Drivers responsibility
when parking or stopping
the vehicle
Never leave an animal,
child or adult who is not self-suffi-
cient alone on your vehicle, even for
a short time.
They may pose a risk to themselves
or to others by starting the engine,
activating equipment such as the
electric windows or locking the
doors.
Also, in hot and/or sunny weather,
please remember that the tempera-
ture inside the passenger compart-
ment increases very quickly.
RISK OF DEATH OR SERIOUS
INJURY.
1.8
RENAULT "HANDS-FREE" CARD: use (1/4)
Do not store the RENAULT card
anywhere it may come into con-
tact with other electronic equipment
(computer, phone, etc.) as this could
hinder its operation.
There are two ways to unlock/lock the
vehicle:
the RENAULT card in “Hands-free”
mode;
the RENAULT card in remote con-
trol mode.
Using the card in hands-free
mode
In “hands-free” mode, it is possible to
lock/unlock the vehicle without using
any of the RENAULT card’s buttons,
as long as the card is within the access
zone 1.
Note: It is possible to deactivate the
hands-free system – please refer to
the information on the “Vehicle settings
customisation menu” in Section 1.
11
1
Drivers responsibility
when parking or stopping
the vehicle
Never leave an animal,
child or adult who is not self-suffi-
cient alone on your vehicle, even for
a short time.
They may pose a risk to themselves
or to others by starting the engine,
activating equipment such as the
electric windows or locking the
doors.
Also, in hot and/or sunny weather,
please remember that the tempera-
ture inside the passenger compart-
ment increases very quickly.
RISK OF DEATH OR SERIOUS
INJURY.
1.9
RENAULT "HANDS-FREE" CARD: use (2/4)
To indicate that the vehicle has been
locked, the hazard warning lights and
indicator lights flash once and then
light up for approximately four sec-
onds, and a beep sounds in confirma-
tion.
Locking using button 2
With the doors and boot closed, press
button 2 on one of the front door han-
dles. The vehicle will lock. The indicator
lights and hazard warning lights flash
twice to indicate that the doors have
locked.
Special features of the locking
system
After locking by pressing button 2, you
have to wait approximately 3 seconds
to be able to unlock the vehicle again.
During these three seconds, the door
handles can be tried to make sure that
the vehicle is locked properly. If a door
is open or not properly closed:
when locking by pressing the 2
button, the vehicle is locked then
quickly unlocked without the hazard
warning lights and side indicator
lights flashing;
the vehicle will not lock as you move
away.
2
“Hands-free” unlocking
With the RENAULT card in zone 1,
press button 2 on the handle of one of
the front doors: the vehicle unlocks.
Unlocking is indicated by one flash of
the hazard warning lights and the indi-
cator lights.
Pressing the button 3 unlocks the entire
vehicle and releases the boot.
The “hands-free” system may experi-
ence temporary difficulties if one of the
sensors built into the inside of the door
handle is obscured (by dirt, mud, snow,
gritting salt etc.).
3
Clean the sensors. If there is still a
problem, contact an approved dealer.
Remote “Hands-free” locking
(depending on vehicle)
With the RENAULT card on you, and
doors and boot closed, move away
from the vehicle: it will lock automati-
cally as soon as you leave the access
zone.
Note: The distance at which the vehicle
locks depends on the surroundings.
1.10
RENAULT "HANDS-FREE" CARD: use (3/4)
Using the card as a remote
control
Unlocking with the card RENAULT
Press button 5.
Unlocking is indicated by one flash of
the hazard warning lights and the indi-
cator lights.
Locking using the RENAULT card
With the doors and boot closed, press
button 6: the vehicle locks.
The indicator lights and hazard warning
lights flash twice to indicate that the
doors have locked.
NB: The maximum distance at which
the vehicle locks depends on the sur-
roundings.
Special features
If an opening element (a door or the
luggage compartment) is open or not
properly closed, the vehicle cannot be
locked. The vehicle will lock/unlock in
quick succession, but the hazard warn-
ing lights and the side indicator lights
will not flash.
5
6
4
The card buttons are deactivated
when the engine is running.
Particular features of the locking
system (continued)
If provided with the vehicle, if the
RENAULT card has been in the detec-
tion zone for about 15 minutes, remote
locking is disabled.
The vehicle cannot be locked if the card
is within the zone 4.
If the vehicle is unlocked by pressing
the button on the RENAULT card, but
the doors or boot are not then opened;
remote “hands-free” locking is disabled.
1.11
Locking/unlocking only the
boot
Press the button 7 to lock/unlock the
boot only.
7
RENAULT "HANDS-FREE" CARD: use (4/4)
Drivers responsibility
when parking or stopping
the vehicle
Never leave an animal,
child or adult who is not self-suffi-
cient alone on your vehicle, even for
a short time.
They may pose a risk to themselves
or to others by starting the engine,
activating equipment such as the
electric windows or locking the
doors.
Also, in hot and/or sunny weather,
please remember that the tempera-
ture inside the passenger compart-
ment increases very quickly.
RISK OF DEATH OR SERIOUS
INJURY.
4
If, while the engine is running, a door
is opened and closed, and the card is
no longer in the zone 4, the message
“Keycard not detected” indicates that the
card is not inside the vehicle. This will,
for example, prevent you from driving
away after dropping off a passenger
who has kept the card on them.
The warning disappears when the card
is detected again.
1.12
Never use deadlocking if
someone is still inside the
vehicle.
To activate deadlocking
Press button 2 twice in quick succes-
sion.
With the vehicle unlocked, you can also
press the button 3 on the driver’s door,
passenger’s door or the boot twice in
quick succession (or, depending on the
vehicle, on the tailgate of the rear door).
In both cases, the indicator lights and
hazard warning lights flash five times
to indicate that the doors have locked.
If the vehicle is equipped with a dead-
locking function, this allows you to lock
the opening elements and to prevent
the doors from being unlocked using
the interior handles (for example, by
breaking the window and then trying to
open the door from the inside).
RENAULT CARD: deadlocking
Special feature
The deadlocking cannot be activated
when the hazard warning lights or the
side lights are lit.
To deactivate deadlocking
Unlock the vehicle using button 1 on
the RENAULT card.
Unlocking is indicated by one flash of
the hazard warning lights and the indi-
cator lights.
1
2
3
1.13
LOCKING, UNLOCKING THE DOORS (1/3)
If the remote control or,
depending on the vehicle, the
RENAULT card does not work
In some cases, the radio frequency
remote control or the RENAULT card
may not work:
RENAULT card/radio frequency
remote control battery worn or run
flat, vehicle battery flat, etc.
use of appliances operating on the
same frequency as the card (mobile
phone, etc.);
vehicle located in a high electromag-
netic radiation zone.
Never leave your vehicle
with the key or RENAULT
card inside.
It is then possible:
depending on the vehicle, use the
radio frequency remote control or
the emergency key integrated in the
card to unlock the front left-hand
door;
to lock each of the doors manually;
to use the interior door locking/un-
locking control (refer to the following
pages).
2
1
Vehicles with key/remote
control
Using the key
Insert the key 2 into the lock 1 and lock
or unlock the front left-hand door.
1.14
LOCKING, UNLOCKING THE DOORS (2/3)
1
Using the integrated key
Insert the key 4 into the lock 1 and lock
or unlock the front left-hand door.
Once you are inside the vehicle, put the
key back in its casing in the RENAULT
card.
4
Vehicles with RENAULT card
Access key 4 integrated in the card
Slide the rear casing 3 downwards
while pressing on zone A.
4
A
3
1.15
LOCKING, UNLOCKING THE DOORS (3/3)
Interior locking/unlocking
door control
The switch 5 located on the driver and
passenger doors simultaneously con-
trols the doors and the boot.
Unlocking: press the switch 5 on the
side
.
Locking: press the switch 5 on the side
.
If a door or the tailgate is open or not
closed properly, the doors and tailgate
lock/unlock quickly.
If transporting an object with the tail-
gate open, you can still lock the doors:
with the engine stopped, press and
hold the switch 5 on the side
for
more than five seconds to lock the
other doors.
Locking the opening
elements without the
RENAULT card or the key
For example, in the event of a dis-
charged battery or the RENAULT card
or key temporarily not working, etc.
With the engine switched off and
an opening element (door or boot)
open, press and hold the switch 5 on
side
for more than 5 seconds.
When the door is closed, all the doors
and the tailgate will be locked.
Unlocking the vehicle from the outside
is only possible with the RENAULT card
in the vehicle’s access zone or using
the key.
Door and tailgate status
indicator
With the ignition on, the warning
light 6 informs you of the locking status
of the opening elements:
– indicator light on, the doors and tail-
gate are locked;
– indicator light off, the doors and tail-
gate are unlocked.
When you lock the doors from the out-
side, the indicator light remains lit for a
moment, and then goes out.
6
Drivers responsibility
If you decide to keep the
doors locked when you are
driving, remember that it
may be more difficult for those as-
sisting you to gain access to the
passenger compartment in the
event of an emergency.
5
1.16
Opening from the inside
Pull the handle 3.
Lights-on reminder buzzer
If you have switched off the ignition
and left the lights switched on, a re-
minder buzzer will sound when a door
is opened and if the light stalk is not in
position AUTO.
Opening the doors from the
outside
With the doors unlocked, pull handle 1.
Special feature on vehicles
equipped with a RENAULT card
With the doors locked, press button 2
on handle 1 of one of the two front
doors and pull towards you.
OPENING AND CLOSING THE DOORS (1/2)
1
3
As a safety precaution,
the doors should only be
opened or closed when the
vehicle is stationary.
2
Door/tailgate open buzzer
At a standstill, the warning light 4 lights
up on the instrument panel alongside
the warning light 5 2 indicating the
opening elements (door, boot) are open
or incorrectly closed.
Once the vehicle reaches a speed of
approximately 12 mph (20 km/h), a
warning light indicates the opening
element(s) (door, boot) open of im-
properly closed, alongside the mes-
sage “Boot open” or “Door open” and a
beep will sound for around 40 seconds
or until the opening element is closed.
4
5
1.17
6
Vehicle with manual door locking
To make it impossible for the rear doors
to be opened from the inside, move
lever 6 on each door and check from
the inside that the doors are securely
locked.
OPENING AND CLOSING THE DOORS (2/2)
Drivers responsibility
when parking or stopping
the vehicle
Never leave an animal,
child or adult who is not self-suffi-
cient alone on your vehicle, even for
a short time.
They may pose a risk to themselves
or to others by starting the engine,
activating equipment such as the
electric windows or locking the
doors.
Also, in hot and/or sunny weather,
please remember that the tempera-
ture inside the passenger compart-
ment increases very quickly.
RISK OF DEATH OR SERIOUS
INJURY.
1.18
Operating principle
After the vehicle is started, the system
automatically locks the doors when you
are driving at approximately 6 mph
(10 km/h) and over.
The door can be unlocked:
by pressing the central door unlock-
ing switch 1
.
at a standstill, by opening a front
door from inside the vehicle.
NB: if a door is opened or closed, it
will automatically lock again when the
vehicle reaches a speed of 6 mph
(10 km/h).
RENAULT ANTI-INTRUDER DEVICE (RAID)
Drivers responsibility
If you decide to keep the
doors locked when you are
driving, remember that it
may be more difficult for those as-
sisting you to gain access to the
passenger compartment in the
event of an emergency.
1
2
Depending on the vehicle, you can
also deactivate/activate this function
from the instrument panel or, depend-
ing on the vehicle, from the multifunc-
tion screen.
Refer to “Vehicle settings customisation
menu” in Section 1, regarding the “Lock
doorswhen in motion” function.
Operating faults
If you find an operating fault (no au-
tomatic locking, the warning light 2
does not light up when trying to lock
the doors and boot, etc.), firstly check
that the doors and boot lid are properly
closed. If they are properly closed, con-
tact an authorised dealer.
Activating/deactivating the
function
To switch it on: with the vehicle at a
standstill and the engine running, press
the switch 1 on side until a beep
sounds.
To deactivate: with the vehicle at a
standstill and the engine running, press
the switch 1 on side
until two
beeps sound.
1.19
FRONT HEADRESTS
To raise the headrest
Pull the headrest upwards to the de-
sired height. Check that it is correctly
locked.
To lower the headrest
Press button 3 and guide the headrest
down to the desired height. Check that
it is correctly locked in place.
A
3
To raise the headrest
Raise the headrest to its highest po-
sition (tilt the seatback backwards if
necessary). Press button 3 and lift the
headrest to release it.
To refit the headrest
Check that the headrest rods are
clean 2.
The rod with a notch should be in-
serted into the slot 1 fitted with a lock-
ing button 3.
Insert the headrest rods into the holes
(tilt the seatback backwards if neces-
sary).
Press the 3 button and push in the
headrest as far as it will go, then adjust
it to the desired height. Check that
each rod 2 on the seatback is securely
locked.
The headrest is important
for safety. Ensure that it is in
place and in the correct po-
sition: the top of the head-
rest should be as close as possible
to the top of the head and there must
be a minimal distance between the
head and the headrest A.
2
1
1.20
To raise or lower the seat
base
Move lever 2 as many times as neces-
sary upwards or downwards.
To tilt the seatback
Lift the lever 3 and move the seatback
to the desired position.
To move the seat forwards or
backwards
Lift handle 1 to unlock. Release the
handle once the seat is in the correct
position and ensure that the seat is
locked.
FRONT SEATS WITH MANUAL CONTROL (1/2)
2
1
3
For safety reasons, carry
out any adjustments when
the vehicle is not being
driven.
We would advise you not to recline
the seatbacks too far to ensure that
the effectiveness of the seat belts is
not reduced.
Nothing should be placed on the
floor (area in front of driver) as such
objects may slide under the pedal
during braking manoeuvres, thus
obstructing its use.
5
6
To adjust the lumbar support
on the drivers seat
Lower handle 5 to increase the support
and lift to decrease it.
Heated seats
With the ignition on, press the switch 6
for the seat desired. The switch warn-
ing lights come on.
The system automatically decides
whether or not the heating is needed.
Pressing the button again lowers the
temperature. Pressing a third time
switches the heating off.
1.21
Table function
Depending on the vehicle, the passen-
ger seatback may be folded down onto
the seat base to create a table.
Lower the headrest;
move the seat back;
Lift the lever 3 and tilt the seatback
forwards as far as possible;
pull the handle 7 and fully lower the
seatback.
FRONT SEATS WITH MANUAL CONTROL (2/2)
When the front seat is in
table position, the front pas-
senger air bag must be dis-
abled (see information on
“Child safety: activating/deactivat-
ing the front passenger air bag” in
Section 1).
Risk of serious injury caused by
items resting on the seatback table
which may be dislodged when the
air bag is deployed.
The label (on the dashboard) and
the markings (on the windscreen)
remind you of these instructions.
7
For your safety, attach any
transported objects when
the seat is in the table po-
sition.
When using the passenger seat in table
position, you must not use the two rear
seats immediately behind it.
Repositioning the seat
Make sure that nothing prevents the
seat from moving.
Pull the handle 7 and raise the seat-
back, ensuring that it locks firmly in
place.
Reposition the seat base.
Be sure to hold the seat-
back when placing it in the
flat position. Risk of injury.
For safety reasons, carry
out any adjustments when
the vehicle is not being
driven.
3
1.22
DRIVER’S SEAT WITH ELECTRIC CONTROLS
For safety reasons, carry
out any adjustments when
the vehicle is not being
driven.
Make sure that the seatbacks are
correctly locked in place.
We would advise you not to recline
the seatbacks too far to ensure that
the effectiveness of the seat belts is
not reduced.
No object should be placed on the
floor (in front of the driver). such
objects may slide under the pedals
during sudden braking manoeuvres
and obstruct their use.
Adjusting the seat squab:
To move the seat forwards or back
Move the switch 1 forwards or back-
wards.
To raise or lower the seat base
Move the switch 1 up or down.
Adjusting the seatback:
To tilt the seatback, move the switch 2
forwards or backwards.
Heated seats
With the ignition on, press the switch 4
for the seat desired. The switch warn-
ing lights come on.
The system automatically decides
whether or not the heating is needed.
Pressing the button again lowers the
temperature. Pressing a third time
switches the heating off.
1
2
To adjust the seat’s lumbar
position
Lower the handle 3 to increase the sup-
port and lift to decrease it.
3
4
1.23
Always wear your seat belt when trav-
elling in your vehicle. You must also
comply with the legislation of the par-
ticular country you are in.
SEAT BELTS (1/4)
1
2
Incorrectly adjusted or
twisted seat belts may
cause injuries in the event
of an accident.
Use one seat belt per person,
whether child or adult.
Even pregnant women should wear
a seat belt. In this case, ensure that
the lap belt is not exerting too much
pressure on the abdomen, but do
not allow any slack.
Before starting, first adjust your driv-
ing position, then ask all occupants
to adjust their seat belts to ensure
optimum protection.
Adjusting your driving
position
Sit well back in your seat (having
first removed your coat or jacket).
This is essential to ensure your back
is positioned correctly;
adjust the distance between the
seat and the pedals. Your seat
should be as far back as possible
while still allowing you to depress
the clutch pedal fully. The seatback
should be adjusted so that your arms
are slightly bent when you hold the
steering wheel;
adjust the position of your head-
rest. For the maximum safety, your
head must be as close as possible to
the headrest;
adjust the height of the seat. This
adjustment allows you to select the
seat position which offers you the
best possible view;
adjust the position of the steering
wheel.
Adjusting the seat belts
Sit with your back firmly against the
seatback.
Shoulder strap 1 should be as close as
possible to the base of the neck but not
on it.
Lap belt 2 should be worn flat over the
thighs and against the pelvis.
The belt should be worn so that it is
as close as possible to your body, i.e.:
avoid wearing heavy clothing or keep-
ing bulky objects under the belts, etc.
1.24
SEAT BELTS (2/4)
Locking
Unwind the belt slowly and smoothly
and ensure that buckle 3 locks into
catch 5 (check that it is locked by pull-
ing on buckle 3).
If the belt jams, allow it to return slightly
before attempting to unwind it again.
If your seat belt is completely jammed,
pull slowly, but firmly, so that just over
3 cm unwinds. Allow it to return slightly
before attempting to unwind it again.
If there is still a problem, contact an ap-
proved dealer.
1
5
3
4
5
ß
Drivers seat belt reminder
and, depending on the vehi-
cle, front passenger seat belt re-
minder
This lights up on the central display
when starting the engine then, if the
driver’s or front passenger’s seat belt
(if this seat is occupied) is not fastened
and the vehicle has reached approxi-
mately 12 mph (20 km/h), it flashes and
a bleep sounds for around 120 sec-
onds.
Note: an object placed on the passen-
ger seat base may activate the warning
light in some cases.
Rear seat belt reminder (depending
on vehicle)
Warning light
ß lights up on the
central display, accompanied by the
graphic 6 on the instrument panel for
approximately 30 seconds each time
the vehicle is started, a door is opened
or a rear seat belt is fastened or unfas-
tened.
Check that the rear passengers are
wearing seat belts and that the number
of seat belts shown as fastened cor-
responds to the number of rear seat
places occupied.
On the graphic 6:
marker in green: seat belt fastened;
marker in red: seat belt unfastened.
Unfastening
Press button 4 and the seat belt will be
rewound by the inertia reel. Guide the
belt.
6
1.25
SEAT BELTS (3/4)
Check that the rear seat
belts are positioned and
operating correctly each
time the rear bench seat is
moved.
Rear seat belts 8
The belts are locked, unlocked and
adjusted in the same way as the front
belts.
Adjusting the height of the
front seat belts
Use button 7 to adjust the seat belt
height so that the shoulder strap is worn
as shown previously. Press the button 7
and raise or lower the seat belt. Make
sure that the seat belt is locked in posi-
tion correctly after you have adjusted it.
7
8
8
1.26
The following information applies to the vehicle’s front and rear seat belts.
No modification may be made to the component parts of the originally fitted restraint system: seat belts, seats and
their mountings. For special operations (e.g. fitting child seats), contact an authorised dealer.
Do not use devices which allow any slack in the belts (e.g. clothes pegs, clips, etc.): a seat belt which is worn too
loosely may cause injury in the event of an accident.
Never wear the shoulder strap under your arm or behind your back.
– Never use the same belt for more than one person and never hold a baby or child on your lap with your seat belt around
them.
The belt should never be twisted.
– Following an accident, have the seat belts checked and replaced if necessary. Always replace your seat belts as soon as
they show any signs of wear.
Make sure that the buckle is inserted into the appropriate catch.
– Ensure that no objects are placed in the area around the seat belt catch as they could prevent it from being properly se-
cured.
– Make sure the seat belt catch is properly positioned (it should not be hidden away, crushed or flattened by people or ob-
jects).
SEAT BELTS (4/4)
1.27
METHODS OF RESTRAINT IN ADDITION TO THE FRONT SEAT BELTS (1/4)
Depending on the vehicle, they are
composed of:
seat belt inertia reel pretension-
ers;
drivers lap belt pretensioners;
chest-level load limiter;
airbags driver and passenger
front.
These systems are designed to act in-
dependently or together when the vehi-
cle is subjected to a frontal impact.
Depending on the severity of the
impact, the system can trigger:
seat belt locking;
the seat belt inertia reel pretensioner
(which engages to correct seat belt
slack);
the lap belt pretensioners to hold the
occupant in his seat;
the front airbag.
Pretensioners
The pretensioners hold the seat belt
against the body, holding the occupant
more securely against the seat, thus in-
creasing the seat belt’s efficiency.
In the event of a severe frontal impact
and if the ignition is switched on, the
system may engage the following de-
pending on the force of the impact:
seat belt inertia reel pretensioner 1
which instantly retracts the seat belt;
the lap belt pretensioner 2 for the
driver only.
Have the entire restraint
system checked following
an accident.
No operation whatso-
ever is permitted on any part
of the system (pretensioners,
airbags, computers, wiring) and
the system components must not
be reused on any other vehicle,
even if identical.
To avoid incorrect triggering of
the system which may cause
injury, only qualified personnel
from an approved dealer may
work on the pretensioner and air
bag system.
The electric trigger system may
only be tested by a specially
trained technician using special
equipment.
When the vehicle is scrapped,
contact an approved dealer for
disposal of the pretensioner and
airbags gas generators.
1
2
1.28
Load limiter
Above a certain severity of impact, this
mechanism is used to limit the force of
the belt against the body so that it is at
an acceptable level.
driver and passenger front
Airbags
Fitted to the driver and passenger
sides.
The presence of this equipment is indi-
cated by the word “Airbag” on the steer-
ing wheel, dashboard (in area airbag A)
and, depending on the vehicle, a label
on the lower section of the windscreen.
Each airbag system consists of:
an airbag and gas generator fitted on
the steering wheel for the driver and
in the dashboard for the passenger;
an electronic unit for system monitor-
ing which controls the gas generator
electrical trigger system;
– a single
å warning light on the
instrument panel.
METHODS OF RESTRAINT IN ADDITION TO THE FRONT SEAT BELTS (2/4)
A
The airbag system uses py-
rotechnic principles. This
explains why, when the
airbag inflates, it will gener-
ate heat, produce smoke (this does
not mean that a fire is about to start)
and make a banging noise. In a situ-
ation where an airbag is required, it
will inflate immediately and this may
cause some minor, superficial graz-
ing to the skin or other problems.
1.29
METHODS OF RESTRAINT IN ADDITION TO THE FRONT SEAT BELTS (3/4)
Operating faults
This warning light å will light up on
the instrument panel when the ignition
is switched on and then go out after a
few seconds.
If it does not light up when the ignition
is switched on, or comes on when the
engine is running, there is a fault in the
system.
Contact your approved Dealer as soon
as possible. Your protection will be re-
duced until this fault is rectified.
Operation
This system is only operational when
the ignition is switched on.
In a severe frontal impact, the airbags
inflate rapidly, cushioning the impact
of the driver's head and chest against
the steering wheel and of the front pas-
senger against the dashboard. The air-
bags then deflate immediately so that
the passengers are not in any way hin-
dered from leaving the vehicle.
1.30
METHODS OF RESTRAINT IN ADDITION TO THE FRONT SEAT BELTS (4/4)
Warnings concerning the drivers airbag
Do not modify the steering wheel or the steering wheel boss.
Do not cover the steering wheel boss under any circumstances.
Do not attach any objects (badge, logo, clock, telephone holder, etc.) to the steering wheel boss.
The steering wheel must not be removed (except by qualified personnel from our Network).
When driving, do not sit too close to the steering wheel. Sit with your arms slightly bent (see the information on “Adjusting
your driving position” in Section 1). This will allow sufficient space for the air bag to deploy correctly and be fully effective.
Warnings concerning the passenger airbag
Do not attach or glue any objects (badge, logo, clock, telephone holder, etc.) to the dashboard on or near the airbag.
Do not place anything between the dashboard and the passenger (pet, umbrella, walking stick, parcels, etc.).
– The passenger must not put his or her feet on the dashboard or seat as there is a risk that serious injuries may occur. In
general, parts of the body should be kept away from the dashboard (knees, hands, head, etc.).
The devices in addition to the front passenger seat belt should be reactivated as soon as a child seat is removed, to ensure
the protection of the passenger in the event of an impact.
A REAR-FACING CHILD SEAT MUST NOT BE FITTED TO THE FRONT PASSENGER SEAT UNLESS
THE ADDITIONAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS, IE. THE PASSENGER AIR BAG, ARE DEACTIVATED.
(refer to the information on “Child safety: deactivating/activating the front passenger airbag” in Section 1)
All of the warnings below are given so that the airbag is not obstructed in any way when it is inflated and also to prevent
the risk of serious injuries caused by items which may be dislodged when it inflates.
1.31
METHODS OF RESTRAINT IN ADDITION TO THE REAR SIDE SEAT BELTS
Force limiter
Above a certain severity of impact, this
mechanism is used to limit the force of
the belt against the body so that it is at
an acceptable level.
Have the entire restraint
system checked following
an accident.
No operation whatsoever
is permitted on any part of the
system (air bags, electronic con-
trol units, wiring) and the system
components must not be reused
on any other vehicle, even if iden-
tical.
– Only qualified personnel from
our Network may work on the air
bags; otherwise the system may
trigger accidentally and cause
injury.
1.32
Side Airbags
An airbag can be fitted to each front
seat and the rear side seats, which are
deployed on the side of the seat (door
side) to protect the occupants in the
case of a severe side impact.
Curtain Airbags
These are airbag fitted along the sides
of the vehicle in the ceiling which trigger
along the front and rear door side win-
dows to protect the passengers in case
of a severe side impact.
SIDE PROTECTION DEVICES
Warning relating to the side airbag
Fitting seat covers: seats equipped with an airbag require covers spe-
cifically designed for your vehicle. Contact an approved Dealer to find out
if these covers are available. The use of any covers other than those de-
signed for your vehicle (and including those designed for another vehicle) may
affect the operation of the airbags and reduce your protection.
Do not place any accessories, objects or even pets between the seatback, the
door and the internal fittings. Do not cover the seatback with any items such as
clothes or accessories. This may prevent the air bag from operating correctly
or cause injury when the airbag is deployed.
No work or modification whatsoever may be carried out on the seat or internal
fittings, except by qualified personnel from an approved Dealer.
Depending on the vehicle, a mark-
ing on the windscreen informs you
of the presence of additional means
of restraint (air bags, pretensioners,
etc.) in the passenger compartment.
1.33
ADDITIONAL METHODS OF RESTRAINT
The airbag is designed to complement the action of the seat belt. Both the
air bags and seat belts are integral parts of the same protection system.
It is therefore essential to wear seat belts at all times. If seat belts are not
worn, the occupants are exposed to the risk of serious injury in the event
of an accident. It may also increase the risk of minor superficial injuries occurring
when the airbag is deployed, although such minor injuries are always possible
with air bags.
If the vehicle should overturn or in the event of a rear impact, however severe,
the pretensioners and airbags are not always triggered. Impacts to the underside
of the vehicle, e.g. from pavements, potholes or stones, can all trigger these sys-
tems.
No work or modification whatsoever may be carried out on any part of the
airbag system (airbags, pretensioners, computer, wiring harness, etc.), except
by qualified Network personnel.
To ensure that the system is in good working order and to avoid accidental trig-
gering of the system which may cause injury, only qualified Network personnel
may work on the airbag system.
As a safety precaution, have the airbag system checked if your vehicle has
been involved in an accident, or is stolen or broken into.
– When selling or lending the vehicle, inform the user of these points and hand
over this handbook with the vehicle.
When scrapping your vehicle, contact your approved Dealer for disposal of the
gas generator(s).
All of the warnings below are given so that the airbag is not obstructed in any
way when it is inflated and also to prevent the risk of serious injuries caused
by items which may be dislodged when it inflates.
Operating faults
å This warning light comes on
when the engine is started and then
goes out after approximately three se-
conds.
If it does not come on when the ignition
is switched on or if it stays on, there is a
fault in the system.
Contact your approved Dealer as soon
as possible.
Your protection will be reduced until this
fault is rectified.
1.34
CHILD SAFETY: General information (1/2)
Carrying children
Please ensure that you comply with the
legislation of your country.
Children, and adults, must be correctly
seated and strapped in for all journeys.
The children being carried in your vehi-
cle are your responsibility.
A child is not a miniature adult. Children
are at risk of specific injuries as their
muscles and bones have not yet fin-
ished growing. The seat belt alone
would not provide suitable protection.
Use an approved child seat and ensure
you use it correctly.
A collision at 30 mph
(50 km/h) is the same as fall-
ing a distance of 10 metres.
Transporting a child without
a restraint is the equivalent of allow-
ing him or her to play on a fourth-
floor balcony without railings.
Never travel with a child held in your
arms. In the event of an accident,
you will not be able to keep hold of
the child, even if you yourself are
wearing a seat belt.
If your vehicle has been involved in
a road accident, replace the child
seat and have the seat belts and
ISOFIX anchorage points checked.
To prevent the doors being
opened, use the “Child
safety” device (refer to the
information on “Opening
and closing the doors” in Section 1).
Drivers responsibility
when parking or stopping
the vehicle
Never leave an animal,
child or adult who is not self-suffi-
cient alone on your vehicle, even for
a short time.
They may pose a risk to themselves
or to others by starting the engine,
activating equipment such as the
electric windows or by locking the
doors.
Also, in hot and/or sunny weather,
please remember that the tempera-
ture inside the passenger compart-
ment increases very quickly.
RISK OF DEATH OR SERIOUS
INJURY.
1.35
CHILD SAFETY: General information (2/2)
Using a child seat
The level of protection offered by the
child seat depends on its ability to re-
strain your child and on its installation.
Incorrect installation compromises the
protection it offers the child in the event
of harsh braking or an impact.
Before purchasing a child seat, check
that it complies with the regulations for
the country you are in and that it can
be fitted in your vehicle. Consult an ap-
proved dealer to find out which seats
are recommended for your vehicle.
Before fitting a child seat, read the
manual and respect its instructions. If
you experience any difficulties during
installation, contact the manufacturer
of the equipment. Keep the instructions
with the seat.
Set a good example by always fas-
tening your seat belt and teaching
your child:
to strap themselves in correctly;
to always get in and out of the car
at the kerb, away from busy traf-
fic.
Do not use a second-hand child
seat or one without an instruction
manual.
Check that there are no objects in
the vicinity of the child seat which
could impede its operation.
Never leave a child unat-
tended in the vehicle.
Check that your child is
always strapped in and that
the belt or safety harness used is
correctly set and adjusted. Avoid
wearing bulky clothing which could
cause the belts to slacken.
Never let your child put their head or
arms out of the window.
Check that the child is in the correct
position for the entire journey, espe-
cially if asleep.
1.36
CHILD SAFETY: choosing a child seat
Rear-facing child seats
A baby’s head is, proportionally, heavier
than that of an adult and its neck is very
fragile. Transport the child in this po-
sition for as long as possible (until the
age of 2 at the very least). It supports
both the head and the neck.
Choose a bucket type seat for best side
protection and change it as soon as the
child’s head is higher than the shell.
Forward-facing child seats
The child’s head and abdomen need to
be protected as a priority. A forward-fac-
ing child seat which is firmly attached to
the vehicle will reduce the risk of impact
to the head. Ensure your child travels in
a forward-facing seat with a harness for
as long as their size permits.
Choose a bucket type seat for optimum
side protection.
Booster cushions
From 15 kg or 4 years, the child can
travel using a booster seat, which will
enable the seat belt to be adapted
to suit his/her size and shape. The
booster seat cushion must be fitted with
guides to position the seat belt on the
child’s thighs rather than the stomach.
It is recommended that you use a seat-
back fitted with a belt strap guide which
can be adjusted in terms of height to
position the seat belt in the centre of the
shoulder. It must never rest on the neck
or on the arm.
Choose a bucket type seat for optimum
side protection.
1.37
CHILD SAFETY: choosing a child seat mounting (1/2)
There are two ways of attaching child
seats: via the seat belt or using the
ISOFIX system.
Attachment via the seat belt
The seat belt must be adjusted to
ensure that it is effective in the event of
harsh braking or an impact.
Ensure that the strap paths indicated
by the child seat manufacturer are re-
spected.
Always check that the seat belt is cor-
rectly fastened by pulling it up, then
pulling it out fully whilst pressing on the
child seat.
Check that the seat is correctly held by
moving it from side to side and back
to front: the seat should remain firmly
fixed.
Check that the child seat has not been
installed at an angle and that it is not
resting against a window.
No modifications may be
made to the component
parts of the restraint system
(ISOFIX seat belts, seats
and their mountings) originally fitted.
The seat belt must never
be twisted or the tension
relieved. Never pass the
shoulder strap under the
arm or behind the back.
Check that the seat belt has not
been damaged by sharp edges.
If the seat belt does not operate nor-
mally, it will not protect the child.
Consult an approved dealer. Do not
use this seat until the seat belt has
been repaired.
Do not use the child seat
if it may unfasten the seat
belt restraining it: the base
of the seat must not rest on
the buckle and/or catch of the seat
belt.
Attachment using the ISOFIX
system
Authorised ISOFIX child seats are ap-
proved in accordance with regulation
ECE-R44 in one of the three following
scenarios:
ISOFIX universal 3-point forward-
facing seat;
ISOFIX semi-universal 2-point seat;
– specific.
For the latter two, check that your child
seat can be installed by consulting the
list of compatible vehicles.
Attach the child seat with the ISOFIX
locks, if these are provided. The ISOFIX
system allows quick, easy, safe fitting.
The ISOFIX system consists of 2 rings
and, in some cases, a third ring.
Before using an ISOFIX
child seat that you pur-
chased for another vehicle,
check that its installation is
authorised. Consult the list of ve-
hicles which can be fitted with the
seat from the equipment manufac-
turer.
1.38
CHILD SAFETY: choosing a child seat mounting (2/2)
2
The third ring 2 or 3 is used to attach
the upper strap on some seats ISOFIX.
The ISOFIX anchorage
points have been exclu-
sively designed for child
seats with the ISOFIX
system. Never fit a different type of
child seat, seat belt or other objects
to these anchorage points. Check
that nothing is obstructing the an-
chorage points.
If your vehicle has been involved in
a road accident, have the ISOFIX
anchorage points checked and re-
place your child seat.
Attachment using the ISOFIX
system (continued)
The two rings 1 are located between
the seatback and the seat base of the
seat and are identified by a marking.
To access the rings, insert your finger in
the cover and pull.
Note: Keep the covers you have re-
moved in a storage compartment so as
not to lose or damage them.
The rings are located on the rear seat-
backs and indicated by the symbol
.
In all cases, attach the strap hook to the
corresponding ring 2 and 3 and place
the seat in the desired position.
Pull the belt so that the back of the child
seat comes into contact with the back
of the vehicle seat.
The child seat strap must
be attached to the corre-
sponding ring.
Do not use any other
mounting point.
1
3
1.39
CHILD SAFETY: fitting a child seat, general information (1/2)
In the front seat
The laws concerning children travel-
ling in the front passenger seat differ in
every country. Consult the legislation in
force and follow the indications on the
diagram on the following page.
Before fitting a child seat in this seat (if
authorised):
lower the seat belt as far as possible;
move the seat as far back as possi-
ble;
gently tilt the seatback away from
vertical (approximately 25°);
– on equipped vehicles, raise the seat
base as far as possible.
In all situations, reinsert the headrest to
its full extent so that it does not interfere
with the child seat (see the information
on “Front headrests” in Section 1);
Some seats are not suitable for fitting
child seats. The diagram on the follow-
ing page shows you how to attach a
child seat.
The types of child seats indicated may
not be available. Before using a differ-
ent child seat, check with the manufac-
turer that it can be fitted.
Fit the child seat in a rear
seat wherever possible.
Check that when installing
the child seat in the vehicle
it is not at risk of coming loose from
its base.
If you have to remove the headrest,
check that it is correctly stored so
that it does not come loose under
harsh braking or impact.
Always attach the child seat to the
vehicle even if it is not in use so that
it does not come loose under harsh
braking or impact.
RISK OF DEATH OR
SERIOUS INJURY: before
fitting a rear-facing child
seat to this seat, check
that the air bag has been deacti-
vated (refer to the information on
“Child safety: deactivating/activat-
ing the front passenger air bag” in
Section 1).
After installing the child seat, when this
is possible, you can move the vehi-
cle seat forward if necessary (so as to
leave enough space in the rear seats
for passengers or other child seats). In
the case of a rear-facing child seat, do
not let it touch the dashboard or move it
to the furthest forward position.
Do not change other settings after in-
stalling the child seat.
1.40
Fit the child seat in a rear
seat wherever possible.
In the rear side seat
A carrycot can be installed across the
vehicle and will take up at least two
seats.
Position the child with their feet nearest
the door.
Move the front seat as far forward as
possible to install a rear-facing child
seat, then move back the seat in front
as far as it will go, although without al-
lowing it to come into contact with the
child seat.
For the safety of a child facing forwards,
move the seat in front of the child as
far forward as possible, remember-
ing to move the seatback forwards to
avoid contact between the seat and the
child’s legs.
In all situations, remove the rear head-
rests (refer to the information on the
“Rear headrests” in Section 3). This
must be done before fitting the child
seat.
Check that the forward-facing child seat
is resting against the back of the vehi-
cle seat.
CHILD SAFETY: fitting a child seat, general information (2/2)
Ensure that the child seat
or the child’s feet do not
prevent the front seat from
locking correctly. Refer to
the information on the “Front seat”
in Section 1.
When fitting a child seat
(Group 2 or 3 booster seat),
check that the seat belts op-
erate (wind) correctly: refer
to Section 1 “Rear seat belts”. If
necessary, adjust the position of the
vehicle seat.
1.41
CHILD SEATS: attachment by seat belt (1/3)
RISK OF DEATH OR
SERIOUS INJURY: Before
installing a child seat on the
front passenger seat, check
that the airbag has been deacti-
vated (please refer to “Child safety:
front passenger airbag deactivation
and activation” in Section 1).
Using a child safety system
which is not approved for
this vehicle will not correctly
protect the baby or child.
They risk serious or even fatal injury.
³ Check the status of the airbag
before fitting a child seat or allowing a
passenger to use the seat.
²
Seat not suitable for fitting
child seats.
Child seat attached using the belt
¬ Seat which allows a child seat
with “Universal” approval to be attached
by a seat belt.
1.42
CHILD SEATS: attachment by seat belt (2/3)
Type of child seat Weight of the child
Front passenger
seat (1)
Rear side seats Rear centre seat
Carrycot fitted
across the vehicle
Group 0
< 10 kg X U (3) X
Rear-facing shell
seat
Groups 0 or 0 +
< 10 kg and < 13 kg U (2) U (4) X
Shell seat/rear-facing
seat
Groups 0+ and 1
< 13 kg and 9 to 18 kg U (2) U (4) X
Forward-facing seat
Group 1
9 to 18 kg X U (5) X
Booster seat
Groups 2 and 3
15 to 25 kg and 22 to
36 kg
X U (5) X
(1) RISK OF DEATH OR SERIOUS INJURY: Before installing a child seat on the front passenger seat, check that
the airbag has been deactivated (please refer to “Child safety: front passenger airbag deactivation and activation” in
Section 1).
The table below summarises the information already shown on the diagram on the previous page, to ensure the applica-
ble regulations are respected.
1.43
X = Seat not suitable for fitting child seats of this type.
U = Seat which allows a child seat with “Universal” approval to be installed using a seat belt; check that it can be fitted.
(2) Raise the seat to the maximum and position it as far back as possible, tilting the seatback slightly (approximately 25°).
(3) A carrycot can be installed across the vehicle and will take up at least two seats. Position the child with his or her feet nearest
the door.
(4) Move the seat in front of the child forwards, move the seatback forward to avoid contact between the seat and the child’s legs.
(5) In all situations, remove the rear headrest of the seat on which the child seat is positioned. This must be done before fitting the
child seat. Please refer to the information on the “Rear headrests” in Section 3.
CHILD SEATS: attachment by seat belt (3/3)
1.44
Five-seater version
Type of child seat
Weight of
the child
Seat size ISOFIX
Front passenger
seat
Rear side seats Rear centre seat
Carrycot fitted across
the vehicle
Group 0
< 10 kg F, G X X X
Rear-facing shell
seat
Groups 0 or 0 +
< 10 kg and
< 13 kg
E X IL (1) X
Shell seat/rear-facing
seat
Groups 0+ and 1
< 13 kg and 9 to
18 kg
C, D X IL (1) X
Forward-facing seat
Group 1
9 to 18 kg A, B, B1 X IUF - IL (2) X
Booster seat
Groups 2 and 3
15 to 25 kg and
22 to 36 kg
X IUF - IL (2) X
CHILD SEATS: attachment using the ISOFIX system (1/3)
The table below summarises the information already shown in the diagram on the following pages, to ensure the appli-
cable regulations are respected.
1.45
CHILD SEATS: attachment using the ISOFIX system (2/3)
X = Seat not suitable for fitting child seats ISOFIX.
IUF/IL = On equipped vehicles, seat which allows an approved “Universal/semi-universal” or “vehicle specific” child seat to be at-
tached using the ISOFIX system; check that it can be fitted.
(1) Move the front seat as far forward as possible to install a rear-facing child seat, then move back the seat in front as far as it will
go, although without allowing it to come into contact with the child seat.
(2) In all situations, remove the rear headrest of the seat on which the child seat is positioned. This must be done before fitting the
child seat. Please refer to the information on the “Rear headrests” in Section 3. Move the seat in front of the child forwards,
move the seatback forward to avoid contact between the seat and the child’s legs.
1.46
CHILD SEATS: attachment using the ISOFIX system (3/3)
Child seat fitted using the ISOFIX
mounting
ü Seat which allows a ISOFIX child
seat to be attached.
± The rear seats are fitted with
an anchorage point which allows a
forward-facing ISOFIX child seat with
universal approval to be attached. The
anchorage points are located on the
backs of the rear seats.
The size of the ISOFIX child seat is in-
dicated by a letter:
A, B and B1: for forward-facing seats
in group 1 (9 to 18 kg);
C and D: shell seat or rear-facing
seats in group 0+ (less than 13 kg)
or group 1 (9 to 18 kg);
E: rear-facing shell seats in group 0
(less than 10 kg) or 0+ (less than
13 kg);
F and G: cots in group 0 (less than
10 kg).
Using a child safety system
which is not approved for
this vehicle will not correctly
protect the baby or child.
They risk serious or even fatal injury.
²
Seat which does not allow a
child seat to be fitted.
1.47
CHILD SAFETY: deactivating, activating the front passenger air bag (1/3)
Deactivating the front
passenger airbags
(on equipped vehicles)
Before installing a child seat on the
front passenger seat:
check that the child seat can be in-
stalled on this seat;
– it is essential to deactivate the
airbagfor a rear-facing child seat.
1
2
To deactivate the airbags: with the
vehicle stopped and the ignition off,
push and turn lock 1 to the OFF posi-
tion.
With the ignition on, you must check
that the warning light
] on the dis-
play 2 is lit up and, depending on the
vehicle, that the message “airbag pas-
senger deactivated” is displayed.
This light remains permanently lit to
let you know that you can fit a child
seat.
The passenger airbag must
only be deactivated or acti-
vated when the vehicle is
stationary.
If it is interfered with when the ve-
hicle is being driven, indicator lights
å and © will come on.
Switch the ignition off then on again
to reset the airbag in accordance
with the lock position.
1.48
3
The markings on the dashboard and
labels A on each side of the passen-
ger sun visor 3 (example: label shown
above) remind you of these instruc-
tions.
A
A
CHILD SAFETY: deactivating, activating the front passenger air bag (2/3)
DANGER
Since operation of the front
passenger airbag is not
compatible with the po-
sition of a rear-facing child seat,
NEVER fit a rear-facing child re-
straint system in a seat protected
by an ACTIVATED front AIRBAG.
This can lead to the DEATH of the
CHILD or SERIOUS INJURY.
1.49
CHILD SAFETY: deactivating, activating the front passenger air bag (3/3)
The passenger airbag must
only be deactivated or acti-
vated when the vehicle is
stationary.
If it is interfered with when the ve-
hicle is being driven, indicator lights
å and © will come on.
Switch the ignition off then on again
to reset the airbag in accordance
with the lock position.
1
2
Activating the front
passenger airbags
You should reactivate the airbags as
soon as you remove the child seat from
the front passenger seat to ensure the
protection of the front passenger in the
event of an impact.
Operating faults
It is forbidden to fit a rear-facing child
seat to the front passenger seat if the
airbags activation/deactivation system
is faulty.
Allowing any other passenger to sit in
that seat is not recommended.
Contact your approved dealer as soon
as possible.
To reactivate the airbags: with the
vehicle stopped and the ignition off,
push and turn lock 1 to the ON position.
With the ignition switched on, you must
check that the warning light
] is
out and that the warning light
comes on the display 2 after each start-
up for around 60 seconds.
The front passenger seat belt additional
restraint systems are activated.
1.50
DRIVING POSITION: LEFT-HAND DRIVE (1/2)
2
3 5 6 8
2
12
13 1
15
16
25
17
11
14
18
7
1
1
4
1
2
10
19
21
22
23
24
9
2
20
1.51
DRIVING POSITION: LEFT-HAND DRIVE (2/2)
The equipment fitted, described below, DEPENDS ON THE VERSION AND COUNTRY.
19 Assisted parking or handbrake
control.
20 Gear lever.
21 Ignition switch (vehicles with key).
22 Control for adjusting steering
wheel height and reach.
23 Unlocking controls:
– bonnet;
fuel filler flap.
24 Controls for:
headlight beam height remote ad-
justment;
lighting rheostat for control instru-
ments;
Lane departure warning;
ESP and Traction Control system.
25 Controls for:
– ECO mode;
activation/deactivation of the Stop
and Start function.
1 Air vent.
2 Demister outlet.
3 Stalk for:
direction indicator lights;
– exterior lights;
– fog lights.
4 Cruise control/speed limiter con-
trols.
5 Instrument panel.
6 Driver Airbag and horn location.
7 Controls for:
on-board computer information
read-out and vehicle settings cus-
tomisation menu;
remote radio and navigation
system.
8 Steering column stalk for wind-
screen and rear screen wash/
wiper.
9 Engine start/stop button (vehicle
with RENAULT card).
10 Controls for:
access the main menu;
access the Driving assistance
menu or, depending on the vehi-
cle, the user preferences menu;
– assisted parking.
11 Hazard warning light switch, cen-
tral door locking warning light.
12 Multimedia screen.
13 Heating or air conditioning con-
trols.
14 Passenger Airbag location.
15 Glovebox.
16 Accessories and multimedia
socket.
17 Two and four-wheel drive mode
selector or, depending on the vehi-
cle, traction control.
18 Cruise control/speed limiter main
control.
1.52
DRIVING POSITION: RIGHT-HAND DRIVE (1/2)
2
8
10
11
13
2
1
25
20
14
21
7
3
22
12
1
1 9
1
2
6
23
17
18
16
15
2
24
54
19
1.53
DRIVING POSITION: RIGHT-HAND DRIVE (2/2)
The equipment fitted, described below, DEPENDS ON THE VERSION AND COUNTRY.
16 Unlocking controls:
– bonnet,
fuel filler flap.
17 Ignition switch (vehicles with key).
18 Control for adjusting steering
wheel height and reach.
19 Engine start/stop button (vehicle
with RENAULT card).
20 Accessories and multimedia
socket.
21 Two and four-wheel drive mode
selector or, depending on the vehi-
cle, traction control.
22 Cruise control/speed limiter main
control.
23 Assisted parking or handbrake
control.
24 Gear lever.
25 Glovebox.
1 Air vent.
2 Demister outlet.
3 Passenger Airbag location.
4 Heating or air conditioning con-
trols.
5 Multimedia screen.
6 Controls for:
access the main menu,
access the Driving assistance
menu or, depending on the vehi-
cle, the user preferences menu,
– assisted parking.
7 Hazard warning light switch, cen-
tral door locking warning light.
8 Stalk for:
direction indicator lights;
– exterior lights;
– fog lights.
9 Cruise control/speed limiter con-
trols.
10 Instrument panel.
11 Driver Airbag and horn location.
12 Controls for:
on-board computer information
read-out and vehicle settings cus-
tomisation menu,
remote radio and navigation
system.
13 Steering column stalk for wind-
screen and rear screen wash/
wiper.
14 Controls for:
– ECO mode,
activation/deactivation of the Stop
and Start function.
15 Controls for:
electric headlight beam adjust-
ment;
lighting dimmer for control instru-
ments;
Lane departure warning;
ESP and
Traction Control system.
1.54
š
Side light warning light
á
Main beam headlight tell-
tale
k
Dipped beam headlight tell-
tale
g
Front fog light tell-tale
Rear fog light telltale
Automatic main beam head-
light indicator light
Please refer to the information
on “External signals and lights” in
Section 1.
c
Left-hand direction indicator
tell-tale
b
Right-hand direction indica-
tor tell-tale
M
Low fuel level warning light
It lights up orange when the ig-
nition or the engine is switched on and
goes off after a few seconds.
If it comes on orange while driving and
is accompanied by a beep, fill up with
fuel as soon as possible. There is only
approximately 30 miles (50 km) worth
of fuel left.
A
If no lights or sounds are ap-
parent, this indicates a fault
in the instrument panel. This
indicates that it is essential
to stop immediately (as soon as traf-
fic conditions allow). Ensure that the
vehicle is correctly immobilised and
contact an approved Dealer.
Instrument panel A: this comes on
when the driver's door is opened.
In some cases, the appearance of a
warning light is accompanied by a mes-
sage.
The © warning light means
you should drive very carefully to
an approved dealer as soon as pos-
sible. If you fail to follow this recom-
mendation, you risk damaging your
vehicle.
Warning light ® re-
quires you to stop immedi-
ately, for your own safety,
as soon as traffic conditions
allow. Switch off the engine and do
not restart it. Contact an approved
Dealer.
The display of information shown below DEPENDS ON THE VEHICLE EQUIPMENT AND COUNTRY.
WARNING LIGHTS (1/6)
1.55
WARNING LIGHTS (2/6)
®
STOP light
This lights up when the igni-
tion or engine is switched on and goes
out as soon as the engine is running. It
comes on with other warning lights and/
or messages, and is accompanied by
a beep.
It requires you to stop immediately, for
your own safety, as soon as traffic con-
ditions allow. Switch off the engine and
do not restart it.
Contact an approved Dealer.
À
Oil pressure warning light
It lights up when the ignition or
the engine is switched on and goes off
after a few seconds.
If it comes on on the road, accompa-
nied by the
® warning light and
a beep, stop immediately and cut the
ignition.
Check the oil level. If the level is normal,
the indicator light is being lit by some-
thing else. Contact an approved Dealer.
U
Variable power-assisted
steering warning light
It lights up when the ignition or the
engine is switched on and goes off after
a few seconds.
If it comes on while driving, alongside
the warning light
®, this means
there is a system fault.
Contact an authorised dealer.
D
Brake circuit fault warning
light
It lights up when the ignition or the
engine is switched on and goes off after
a few seconds.
If it comes on during braking and is ac-
companied by the
® warning light
and a beep, it indicates that the fluid
level in the circuit is low or that there is
a braking system fault. Stop as soon as
traffic conditions allow and contact an
authorised dealer.
Ú
Battery charge warning light
It lights up when the ignition or
the engine is switched on and goes off
after a few seconds.
If it comes on on the road, accompa-
nied by the
® warning light and a
beep, this indicates an overload or dis-
charge in the electrical circuit.
Stop as soon as traffic conditions allow
and contact an approved Dealer.
A
The display of information shown below DEPENDS ON THE VEHICLE EQUIPMENT AND COUNTRY.
1.56
WARNING LIGHTS (3/6)
x
Anti-lock braking warning
light
It lights up when the ignition or the
engine is switched on and goes off after
a few seconds.
If it lights up when you are driving, it in-
dicates a fault in the anti-lock braking
system.
Braking will then be as normal, without
the ABS. Contact an approved Dealer
as soon as possible.
Ô
Coolant temperature warn-
ing light
This lights up red when the ignition is
switched on or the engine is started.
If it turns red, stop and let the engine
idle for a minute or two.
The temperature should drop.
Otherwise, stop the engine. Let the
engine cool down before checking the
coolant.
Contact an approved Dealer.
©
Warning light
This lights up when the ignition
or engine is switched on and goes out
as soon as the engine is running. It can
light up in conjunction with other warn-
ing lights and/or messages on the in-
strument panel.
It means you should drive very care-
fully to an approved dealer as soon as
possible. If you fail to follow this recom-
mendation, you risk damaging your ve-
hicle.
Ä
Toxic Fume Filter System
Warning Light
On vehicles which are equipped with it,
this light comes on when the engine is
started and, depending on the vehicle,
when the ignition is switched off if the
vehicle is in the engine standby phase
(refer to the information on the “Stop
and Start function” in Section 2) then
goes out.
If it lights up continuously, consult
your approved dealer as soon as
possible;
if it flashes, reduce the engine speed
until the light stops flashing. Contact
your approved Dealer as soon as
possible.
Refer to the information on “Advice:
antipollution, fuel economy and driving”
in Section 2.
A
The display of information shown below DEPENDS ON THE VEHICLE EQUIPMENT AND COUNTRY.
1.57
WARNING LIGHTS (4/6)
Particle filter system warn-
ing light (petrol version)
Refer to the “Special features of petrol
versions” in Section 2.
A
The display of information shown below DEPENDS ON THE VEHICLE EQUIPMENT AND COUNTRY.
Ó
Brake pedal warning light
This lights up when the brake
pedal should be depressed. Refer to
the information on the “Automatic gear-
box” in Section 2.
Please refer to the information on
“Driving advice, Eco-driving” in
Section 2.
}
Handbrake or electronic
parking brake warning light
Refer to the information on the “Assisted
parking brake” in Section 2.
É
Preheating warning light
(Diesel version)
This should come on when the igni-
tion is switched on. It indicates that the
heater plugs are in operation.
It goes out when preheating is com-
plete. The engine can be started.
2 Door(s) open warning light
Š
Gear change indicator
This lights up to advise you to
change to a higher gear (up arrow) or
lower gear (down arrow).
Please refer to the information on
“Driving advice, Eco-driving” in
Section 2.
å
Indicator lightAirbag
This warning light will be dis-
played on the instrument panel when
the ignition is switched on or the engine
is started, and will then go out after a
few seconds.
If it does not come on when the igni-
tion is switched on, or comes on when
the engine is running, there is a fault in
the system.
Contact your approved Dealer as soon
as possible.
1.58
WARNING LIGHTS (5/6)
The display of information shown below DEPENDS ON THE VEHICLE EQUIPMENT AND COUNTRY.
Assisted parking brake fault
light
Please refer to the information on the
“Assisted parking brake” in Section 2.
Emergency active brake
assist
Refer to the information on “Driving cor-
rection devices and aids” in Section 2.
Warning light for the elec-
tronic stability program
(ESC) and traction control system
It lights up when the ignition or the
engine is switched on and goes off after
a few seconds.
There are several reasons for the warn-
ing light to come on: please refer to the
information on “Driver correction de-
vices and aids” in Section 2.
A
Φ
Speed limiter and cruise
control indicator lights
See the information on the “Speed lim-
iter” and “Cruise control” in Section 2.
Tyre pressure monitoring
system
Refer to the information on the “Tyre
pressure monitoring system” in
Section 2.
Mode warning light ECO
This comes on when ECO
mode is activated.
Please refer to the information on “Eco-
driving” in Section 2.
Warning light for reagent
level and faults in the ex-
haust gas reduction system.
Refer to the information on “Reagent
tank” in Section 1.
Engine standby warning
light
Please see information in the para-
graph on “Stop and Start Function” in
Section 2.
Unavailability of engine
standby warning light
Please see information in the para-
graph on “Stop and Start Function” in
Section 2.
1.59
WARNING LIGHTS (6/6)
The display of information shown below DEPENDS ON THE VEHICLE EQUIPMENT AND COUNTRY.
On display B
Passenger Airbag ON
Refer to the information on
“Child safety: deactivating/activating
the front passenger airbag” in Section 1.
¹
Passenger Airbag OFF
Refer to the information on
“Child safety: deactivating/activating
the front passenger airbag” in Section 1.
ß
Drivers seat belt reminder
and, depending on the vehi-
cle, front passenger seat belt re-
minder
This lights up when the ignition is
switched on, then, if the driver's or front
passenger's (if this seat is occupied)
seat belt is not fastened and the vehicle
has reached approximately 12.4 mph
(20 km/h), it flashes and a beep sounds
for around 2 minutes.
Note: an object placed on the passen-
ger seat base can activate the warning
light.
Rear seat belt reminder (depending
on vehicle)
Warning light
ß comes on, accom-
panied (depending on the vehicle) by
a message indicating the number of
fastened seat belts on the instrument
panel for approximately 30 seconds,
each time the vehicle is started, a door
is opened or a rear seat belt is fas-
tened/unfastened. Check that the rear
passengers are wearing seat belts and
that the number of seat belts shown as
fastened corresponds to the number of
rear seat places occupied.
B
1.60
DISPLAYS AND INDICATORS (1/2)
Instrument panel A
You can customise your instrument
panel with the content and colours of
your choice.
For vehicles fitted with a navigation
system, refer to the handbook for the
equipment.
For vehicles not fitted with a naviga-
tion system, refer to the information on
“Vehicle settings customisation menu”
in Section 1.
Rev counter 4
(graduations x 1000)
A
5
3
Driving style indicator 3
Please refer to the information on “Eco-
driving” in Section 2.
Speedometer 5
(km or miles per hour)
This is displayed differently according
to how the instrument panel is custom-
ised.
Overspeed buzzer
Depending on the vehicle and coun-
try, a buzzer sounds for approximately
10 seconds every 40 seconds, as long
as the vehicle is travelling in excess of
72 mph (120 km/h).
6
Instrument panel in miles
(option to switch to km/h)
Vehicles not fitted with a navigation
system
With the ignition off, press the OK
button 2 and the start button 6;
– using control 1, select “Settings”,
“Instrument panel”, then the unit;
– Press the OK button 2 to confirm.
To return to the previous mode, repeat
the same operation.
4
1
2
1.61
DISPLAYS AND INDICATORS (2/2)
Engine oil level low warning
When the engine is started, the instru-
ment panel display A alerts you when
the minimum oil level is reached. Refer
to the information on the “Engine oil
level” in Section 4.
The first time the warning appears,
it can be cleared by pressing the OK
button 2.
Subsequent warnings will disappear
automatically after 30 seconds.
2
A
Coolant temperature
indicator 6
Fuel level gauge 7
If the level is at the minimum, warn-
ing light
M integrated in the indica-
tor comes on orange, accompanied by
a beep. Fill up as soon as possible.
7
Vehicles fitted with a navigation
system
On the multifunction screen, select
“System” , “User profile” and “Unit”.
Note: In both cases, once the battery
is switched off, the on-board computer
automatically returns to the original unit
of measurement.
Trip computer and warning
system
Refer to the information on the “Trip
computer and warning system” in
Section 1.
6
1.62
1
Display selection keys 2
Scroll through the following information
by repeated short presses on the con-
trol 2 (the display depends on the vehi-
cle equipment and country):
a) total mileage and trip mileage re-
corder;
b) journey parameters:
current fuel consumption;
Estimated range with remaining fuel;
– distance travelled;
– average speed;
c) mileage before service;
d) tyre pressure reset;
e) trip log, operating faults and informa-
tion message readout;
f) Estimated range with remaining rea-
gent.
On-board computer 1
Depending on the vehicle, this includes
the following functions:
– distance travelled;
– journey parameters;
– information messages;
operating fault messages (associ-
ated with the
© warning light);
warning messages (associated with
the
® warning light);
All these functions are described on the
following pages.
TRIP COMPUTER: general information (1/2)
2
1.63
3
ON-BOARD COMPUTER: general information (2/2)
Interpreting some of the
values displayed after
resetting
The values showing average fuel con-
sumption and average speed will
become more stable and reliable the
further you have travelled since the last
time the Reset button was pressed.
The average fuel consumption may de-
crease when:
the vehicle stops accelerating;
the engine reaches its operating
temperature (if the engine was cold
when the reset key was pressed);
when driving from an urban area
onto the open road.
Automatic resetting of the
journey parameters
Resetting occurs automatically when
the maximum value of any of the pa-
rameters is exceeded.
Trip mileage resetting
With “trip mileage recorder” selected
on the display, press key OK 3 until the
mileage recorder resets to zero.
Resetting the journey
parameters (reset button)
with the display showing one of the trip
settings, press key OK 3 until the dis-
play is reset to zero.
1.64
ON-BOARD COMPUTER: trip settings (1/5)
The display of information shown below DEPENDS ON THE VEHICLE EQUIPMENT AND COUNTRY.
Examples of selections Interpreting the display selected
101 778 km
a) Total mileage and trip mileage recorder.
112,4 km
Fuel used
b) Journey parameters:
Fuel consumed since the last reset.
8 l
Current
Current fuel consumption.
This value is displayed after a speed of approximately 20 mph (30 km/h) is
reached.
7,4 l/100
1.65
ON-BOARD COMPUTER: trip settings (2/5)
The display of information shown below DEPENDS ON THE VEHICLE EQUIPMENT AND COUNTRY.
Examples of selections Interpreting the display selected
Range
Estimated range with remaining fuel.
The value is displayed after driving 400 metres.
541 km
Distance
Distance travelled since last reset.
522 km
Average
Average speed since the last reset.
The value is displayed after driving 400 metres.
123,4 km/h
1.66
ON-BOARD COMPUTER: trip settings (3/5)
The display of information shown below DEPENDS ON THE VEHICLE EQUIPMENT AND COUNTRY.
Examples of selections
Interpreting the display selected
On-board computer with mileage-
before-service message
c) Mileage before service or oil change.
Mileage before service
With the ignition switched on, the engine not running and
the display set to “Service Intervals”, press and hold the OK
button for approximately 5 seconds to display the mileage before
service (distance or time to the next service). When the distance
value approaches its limit, there are several possible scenarios:
range less than 930 miles (1,500 km) or one month: the
message “Service due in” is displayed accompanied by the
nearest term (distance or time);
range equal to 0 km/miles or service date reached: the
message “Service required” is displayed accompanied by
warning light
©.
The vehicle requires a service as soon as possible.
Service Intervals
Service in
30 000 km / 12 mo
Service due in
300 km / 24 days
Service required
Reset: to reset the distance before the next service, press and hold button 2 for approximately 10 seconds until the display
shows the mileage before service permanently.
NB: if a service is performed without changing the engine oil, only the mileage before the next service should be reset. In the
event of an oil change, both the distance before the next service and the next oil change should be reset.
1.67
The display of information shown below DEPENDS ON THE VEHICLE EQUIPMENT AND COUNTRY.
TRIP COMPUTER: trip settings (4/5)
Examples of selections
Interpreting the display selected
On-board computer with distance before
next service message (cntd.)
c) Mileage before service or oil change.
Mileage before service
With the ignition switched on, the engine not running and
the display set to “Mileage before service”, press and hold the
OK button for approximately 5 seconds to display the mileage
before the next service, then press the 2 button to view the
mileage before the next oil change (distance or time remaining
before the next service). When the distance value approaches its
limit, there are several possible scenarios:
distance/time remaining less than 900 miles (1,500 km) or
one month: the message “Service due in” is displayed, ac-
companied by the nearest term (distance or time);
range equal to 0 km/miles or service date reached: the
message “Service required” is displayed accompanied by
warning light
©.
The vehicle requires an oil change as soon as possible.
Service Intervals
Oil change in
30 000 km / 24 mo
Service due in
300 km / 24 days
Service required
Depending on the vehicle, the mileage before an oil change varies according to the driving style (frequent driving at low speed,
door-to-door journeys, extensive use at idling speed, towing a trailer, etc.). The distance remaining until the next oil change can
therefore decrease more quickly in some cases than the actual distance travelled.
Resetting: to reset the mileage before a service, press and hold button 2 for approximately 10 seconds until the display shows
the range permanently.
NB: if a service is performed without changing the engine oil, only the mileage before the next service should be reset. In the
event of an oil change, both the distance before the next service and the next oil change should be reset.
1.68
ON-BOARD COMPUTER: trip settings (5/5)
The display of information shown below DEPENDS ON THE VEHICLE EQUIPMENT AND COUNTRY.
Examples of selections Interpreting the display selected
d) Reset the tyre pressure.
Refer to the information on the “Tyre pressure monitor-
ing system” in Section 2.
+ Tyre pressure
No message
memorised
e) Trip log.
Successive display:
information messages (passenger airbag OFF etc.);
operating fault messages (Check injection system,
etc.).
f) Estimated range with remaining reagent.
Refer to the information on “Reagent tank” in Section 1.
Top Up AdBlue
before 2400 km
1.69
TRIP COMPUTER AND WARNING SYSTEM: information messages
Examples of messages Interpreting the display selected
« Parking brake on » Indicates that the parking brake has been applied.
« Checking control functions » Displayed with the ignition on when the vehicle is running self-diagnostics.
« Turn steeringwheel + START »
Turn the steering wheel slightly whilst pressing the vehicle start button to unlock
the steering column.
« Steering wheel not locked » Indicates that the steering column has not been locked.
These can help in the vehicle starting phase, or give information about a selection or a driving status.
Examples of information messages are given in the following pages.
1.70
TRIP COMPUTER AND WARNING SYSTEM: operating fault messages
These appear with the © warning light and mean that you should drive very carefully to an authorised dealer as
soon as possible. If you fail to follow this recommendation, you risk damaging your vehicle.
They disappear when the display selection key is pressed or after several seconds and are stored in the computer log. The
© warning light stays on. Examples of operating fault messages are given in the following pages.
Examples of messages Interpreting the display selected
“Clean diesel filter” Indicates the presence of water in the diesel filter; contact an approved Dealer
as soon as possible.
“Check lighting” Indicates a fault in the headlights.
“Check vehicle” Indicates a fault in one of the pedal sensors, battery management system or oil
level sensor.
“Check airbag” Indicates a fault in the restraint system in addition to the seat belts. In the event
of an accident, it is possible that they may not be triggered.
“Check antipollution system” Indicates a fault in the vehicle’s particle filter system.
– Indicates a fault in the emissions reduction system when it is accompanied
by the
warning light. Refer to the information on “Reagent tank” in
Section 1.
1.71
TRIP COMPUTER AND WARNING SYSTEM: warning message
These appear with the ® warning light and require you to stop immediately, for your own safety, as soon as traf-
fic conditions allow. Stop your engine and do not restart it. Contact an approved Dealer.
Some examples of warning messages are given below. Note: the messages appear on the display either individually or al-
ternately (when there are several messages to be displayed), and may be accompanied by a warning light and/or a beep.
Examples of messages Interpreting the display selected
« Engine failure hazard » Indicates an injection fault, the vehicle’s engine has overheated or there is a
serious engine fault.
« Power steering fault » Indicates a fault in the steering or a problem with the four-wheel drive.
“Braking system fault” or ”Stop vehicle” Indicates a fault in the braking system. Apply the electronic parking brake ma-
nually and ensure that the vehicle is immobilised using a chock.
« Electric failure DANGER » Indicates a fault in the vehicle battery charging circuit (alternator etc.).
« Puncture » Indicates a puncture on the tyre displayed on the instrument panel.
1.72
VEHICLE SETTINGS CUSTOMISATION MENU (1/2)
Adjusting the settings
Select the function to modify:
a) unlocking the driver’s door;
b) automatic locking of the doors while
driving;
c) hands-free function;
d) indicator audio volume;
e) internal welcome sound;
f) external welcome;
g) reading lamp in automatic mode;
h) rear windscreen wiping in reverse
gear;
i) configuration of the driving style indi-
cator;
j) Active noise control.
Select “ON” or “OFF” to activate or de-
activate the function.
For the “Light brightness intensity”
function, select the intensity by press-
ing “+” or “-”.
Depending on the vehicle equipment,
this function allows you to activate/de-
activate and adjust some of the vehi-
cle’s functions.
Vehicles fitted with a
navigation system
Accessing the settings menu
With the vehicle at a standstill, using
the multifunction screen 1, select menu
“Vehicle”, “User settings” to access the
various settings.
1
For safety reasons, carry
out any adjustments when
the vehicle is stationary.
1.73
VEHICLE SETTINGS CUSTOMISATION MENU (2/2)
3
4
If you select either “PARKING ASSIST
VOLUME” or “LANGUAGE”, you will
have to make a further selection (sound
volume of the parking distance control
or instrument panel language). In this
case, make your selection and con-
firm it by holding the switch 3 OK – the
selected value is shown by a
~ in
front of the line.
To exit the menu, press the control 4
upwards or downwards. It may be nec-
essary to carry out this operation sev-
eral times.
Vehicles not fitted with a
navigation system
Accessing the settings menu on
display 2
With the vehicle at a standstill, press
and hold the switch 3 OK to access the
settings menu.
Adjusting the settings
Browse using the control 4 to select the
function to adjust:
a) Lock doorswhen in motion;
b) Unlock driver door only;
c) Auto rear wipe with reverse gear;
d) PARKING ASSIST;
e) Automaticmain beam lights;
f) Lane depart warn volume;
g) Lane depart warn sensitivity;
h) PARKING ASSIST;
i) PARKING ASSIST Volume;
j) LANGUAGE;
k) COLOUR.
= function activated
< function deactivated
Once a line has been selected, press
the switch 3 OK to adjust the function.
The vehicle settings personalisation
menu cannot be used when driv-
ing. At speed exceeding 12 mph
(20 km/h), the instrumental panel
display switches automatically back
to trip computer and warning system
mode.
2
1.74
Power-assisted steering
Variable power-assisted steering
The variable power assisted steering
system is equipped with an electronic
control system which alters the level of
assistance to suit the vehicle speed.
Steering is made easier during parking
manoeuvres (for added comfort) while
the force needed to steer increases
progressively as the speed rises (for
enhanced safety at high speeds).
STEERING WHEEL/POWER-ASSISTED STEERING
For safety reasons, only
adjust the steering wheel
when the vehicle is station-
ary.
Never leave the steering wheel at
full lock while stationary.
Do not switch off the engine
when driving downhill and,
as a general rule, when
driving (the power-assisted
steering and brake cannot operate
normally).
With the engine switched off, or if
there is a system fault, it is still pos-
sible to turn the steering wheel. The
force required will be greater.
1
Adjusting the steering wheel
height and depth
Lower the lever 1 and position the
steering wheel in the required position.
Then, raise the lever fully, beyond the
point of resistance to lock the steering
wheel.
Make sure that the steering wheel is
correctly locked.
1.75
CLOCK AND EXTERIOR TEMPERATURE
External temperature
indicator
Special note:
When the exterior temperature is - 3 °C
to + 3 °C, the °C characters flash (sig-
nalling a risk of ice on the road).
Display 1
Vehicles fitted with a touchscreen
multimedia screen, navigation aid
systems, etc.
The time and exterior temperature are
displayed on the multifunction screen 1.
Refer to the handbook for the equip-
ment.
External temperature
indicator
As ice formation is related
to climatic exposure, local
air humidity and temperature, the
external temperature alone is not
sufficient to detect ice.
1
If the electrical supply is cut (battery
disconnected, broken supply wire,
etc.), the clock will automatically
go back to the right time after a few
minutes once the system is capable
of receiving information GPS.
1.76
REAR VIEW MIRRORS (1/2)
Folding rear view mirrors
Press the switch 1 to fold in the door
mirrors. Press the switch 1 again to au-
tomatically fold out the door mirrors.
Welcome and goodbye function
(depending on the vehicle)
When the door mirrors are not folded in
by pressing switch 1, they:
fold in automatically when the vehi-
cle is locked;
fold out automatically when the vehi-
cle is unlocked.
Exterior rear view mirrors
Adjustment
Select the door mirror using the
switch 2, then use the control 3 to
adjust it to the desired position.
Heated door mirrors
Mirror de-icing is carried out at the
same time as rear screen de-icing.
Please refer to the information
on “Manual air conditioning” and
“Automatic climate control” in Section 3.
Objects observed in the
door mirror glass are actu-
ally closer than they appear.
For your safety, take this
into account in order to correctly
assess the distance before any ma-
noeuvre.
For safety reasons, carry
out any adjustments when
the vehicle is not being
driven.
1
2
3
1.77
REAR VIEW MIRRORS (2/2)
5
Interior rear view mirror
Its position can be adjusted.
Rear view mirror with lever 4
When driving at night, to avoid being
dazzled by the headlights of the vehicle
behind, depress the little lever located
behind rear view mirror 4.
Rear view mirror without lever 4
The rear-view mirror darkens automati-
cally at night if you are being followed
by a vehicle with its lights on.
Depending on the vehicle, you can acti-
vate or disable this function by pressing
the 5 button. The 6 warning light comes
on when the function is active.
Note: the function is reactivated once
the engine is switched off and the doors
are locked/unlocked.
For safety reasons, carry
out any adjustments when
the vehicle is not being
driven.
4
6
1.78
á
Main beam headlights
With the dipped beam
headlights lit, push stalk 1. This indica-
tor light on the instrument panel comes
on.
To return to the dipped headlight posi-
tion, pull the stalk 1 towards you again.
EXTERIOR LIGHTING AND SIGNALS (1/6)
š
Side lights
Turn ring 3 until the symbol is
opposite mark 2. This indicator light on
the instrument panel comes on.
k
Dipped beam
headlights
Manual operation
Turn ring 3 until the symbol is opposite
mark 2. This indicator light on the in-
strument panel comes on.
Automatic operation
Turn ring 3 until the AUTO symbol is op-
posite mark 2: with the engine running,
the dipped beam headlights switch on
or off automatically depending on the
brightness of the light outside, without
any action on stalk 1.
Before driving at night:
check that the electrical
equipment is operating cor-
rectly. As a general precau-
tion, check that the lights are not
obscured (by dirt, mud, snow or ob-
jects being transported).
1
3
2
When driving on the left in a left-
hand drive vehicle (or vice versa),
drivers must readjust their lights
throughout their stay (see “Adjusting
headlight beams” in Section 1).
1
1.79
Automatic main beam
headlights
Depending on the vehicle, this system
switches the main beam headlights on
and off automatically. It uses a camera
located behind the interior rear-view
mirror to detect vehicles that are being
followed and those coming in the oppo-
site direction.
The main beam headlights come on au-
tomatically if:
exterior light is weak;
no other vehicles or lighting are de-
tected;
the vehicle speed is above approxi-
mately 25 mph (40 km/h).
If any of the above conditions are not
fulfilled, the system switches to dipped
beam headlights.
The “automatic main beam
headlights” system should
under no circumstances be
used to replace driver atten-
tion and responsibility with regard
to vehicle lighting and adapting to
light, visibility and traffic conditions.
The system may encounter difficul-
ties under certain conditions, inclu-
ding:
extreme weather conditions (rain,
snow, fog, etc.);
obstruction in front of the wind-
screen or camera;
when a following or oncoming ve-
hicle has weak or hidden lighting;
incorrect settings for the front
headlights;
– reflective systems;
– ...
EXTERIOR LIGHTING AND SIGNALS (2/6)
1
4
Switching on
Vehicle fitted with a navigation
system
On the multifunction screen 4, select
the “Vehicle” menu, “Driving assist-
ance”, and “Automaticmain beam
lights”, and then choose “ON” or “OFF”.
1.80
Activation/deactivation
To activate the automatic main beam
headlights:
– turn ring 3 until the AUTO symbol is
opposite mark 2;
– push stalk 1.
Warning light
comes on the in-
strument panel.
To deactivate the automatic main
beam headlights:
– pull stalk 1;
or turn ring 3 to a position other than
AUTO.
Warning light goes out on the
instrument panel.
Note: make sure the windscreen is not
obscured (dirt, mud, snow, condensa-
tion etc.).
EXTERIOR LIGHTING AND SIGNALS (3/6)
5
6
repeatedly press the control 6 up or
down until you reach the “Automatic
main beam headlights” menu, then
press the switch 5 OK;
– press the 5 OK switch again to acti-
vate or deactivate the function.
Vehicles not fitted with a navigation
system
With the vehicle at a standstill, press
and hold the switch 5 OK to access
the settings menu;
repeatedly press the control 6 up or
down until you reach the “Aides à la
conduite” menu. Press the switch 5
OK;
3
1
2
Using the portable navigation system at night in the windscreen area
below the camera may disturb the operation of the “automatic main beam
headlights” system (risk of reflection on the windscreen).
Each time you start the engine, pull
and then push the stalk 1 to reacti-
vate the system.
1.81
Operating faults
When the message “Check auto li-
ghting” appears on the instrument
panel, the system is deactivated.
Consult an approved dealer.
EXTERIOR LIGHTING AND SIGNALS (4/6)
Switching off the lights
There are two possibilities:
manually, move ring 3 to position 0;
automatically, the lights will go out
when the engine is switched off, the
driver’s door is opened or the vehicle
is locked. In this case, the next time
the engine is started the lights will be
switched back on according to the
position of the ring 3.
Lights-on reminder buzzer
A warning beep sounds when the driv-
er’s door is opened to warn you that the
lights are still on.
Daytime running lights
function
The daytime running lights come on
automatically with no action on stalk 1
when the engine is started, and they go
off once the engine is switched off.
Operating faults
When the message “Check lighting”
with warning light
© is displayed
and warning light
k flashes on the
instrument panel, this indicates that
there is a lighting fault.
Consult an approved dealer.
3
2
1
1.82
“See-me-home lighting”
function
This function allows you to briefly switch
on the dipped beam headlights (to pro-
vide light when opening a gate, etc.).
With the engine and lights switched
off and the ring 3 in position 0 or
AUTO, pull the stalk 1 towards you: the
dipped beam headlights come on for
approximately 30 seconds. To increase
this duration, you may pull the stalk up
to four times (total time restricted to ap-
proximately two minutes). The mes-
sage “Follow-me home for _ _ _” along
with the time the lights will be on for is
displayed on the instrument panel to
confirm this action. You can then lock
your vehicle.
To switch off the lights before they go
out automatically, turn ring 3 to any po-
sition, then return it to the AUTO posi-
tion .
EXTERIOR LIGHTING AND SIGNALS (5/6)
Welcome and goodbye
function
(depending on the vehicle)
Once the function is activated, the day-
time running lights and the rear side
light light up automatically upon detect-
ing the RENAULT card or when the ve-
hicle is unlocked.
They switch off automatically:
approximately one minute after li-
ghting up;
when starting the engine based on
the position of the lighting stalk;
or
upon locking the vehicle.
Activating/deactivating the function
From the multifunction screen, select
menu “vehicle”, “User settings” then
“External welcome”. Choose “ON
or “OFF” to activate or deactivate the
function.
1.83
EXTERIOR LIGHTING AND SIGNALS (6/6)
f
Rear fog lights
Turn centre ring 7 on the stalk
until the symbol faces mark 2, then re-
lease it.
Operation of the fog lights depends on
the exterior lighting selected, and an in-
dicator light will light up on the instru-
ment panel.
Do not forget to switch off the fog lights
when they are no longer needed, to
avoid inconveniencing other road
users.
Switching off the lights
Turn the ring 7 again until the mark 2
is opposite the symbol for the fog light
that you wish to switch off. The corre-
sponding indicator light on the instru-
ment panel goes out.
The fog lights switch off when the exte-
rior lights are switched off.
Cornering lights
(depending on vehicle)
Whenever the dipped beam headlights
are on and under certain conditions (at
speed, the steering wheel at an angle,
in forward gear, the indicator lights on,
etc.), when taking a corner one of the
front fog lights will come on to light the
inside of the bend.
When driving in fog or snow, or
when transporting objects which are
higher than the roof, the headlights
do not come on automatically.
Switching on the fog lights remains
the responsibility of the driver: the
indicator lights on the instrument
panel inform you whether the fog
lights are lit (indicator light on) or not
(indicator light not on).
7
2
g
Front fog lights
Turn centre ring 7 on stalk 1
until the symbol faces mark 2, then re-
lease it.
Operation of the fog lights depends on
the exterior lighting position selected,
and an indicator light will light up on the
instrument panel.
1
1.84
AUDIBLE AND VISUAL SIGNALS
Horn
Press the steering wheel boss A to ac-
tivate the horn.
Headlight flasher
Pull stalk 1 towards you to flash the
headlights.
é
Hazard warning lights
Press switch 2. This switch ac-
tivates all four direction indicators and
the side indicator lights simultaneously.
It must only be used in an emergency to
warn drivers of other vehicles that you
have had to stop in an area where stop-
ping is prohibited or unexpected or that
you are obliged to drive under special
conditions.
Depending on the vehicle, the hazard
warning lights may come on automati-
cally under heavy deceleration. You can
switch them off by pressing switch 2.
Direction indicators
Move stalk 1 parallel to the steering
wheel and in the direction you are going
to turn it.
One-touch mode
When driving, it is possible that the
steering wheel may not be turned suf-
ficiently to return the stalk automatically
to its starting position.
In this case, briefly turn stalk 1 to the in-
termediate position, then release it: the
stalk returns to its original point and the
indicator light flashes three times.
2
A
1
1.85
HEADLIGHT BEAM ADJUSTMENT (1/2)
On vehicles fitted with this function,
control A allows you to adjust the height
of the beams according to the load.
Turn control A downwards to lower the
headlights and upwards to raise them.
A
For vehicles not fitted with a con-
trol A, the headlight adjustment is
automatic, depending on the vehi-
cle load.
For manual settings
Examples of adjustment positions of control A
according to the load and the headlight
Halogen headlights LED headlight
Driver alone or with front
passenger
00
All seats occupied 11
Driver with passengers and
luggage (or load) reaching the
maximum permissible all-up
weight
3 and 43
Driver without passengers and
luggage (or load) reaching the
maximum permissible all-up
weight
44
The table below gives some examples. In all cases, adjust control A according to the
vehicle load so that the road can be seen and other drivers are not dazzled.
1.86
HEADLIGHT BEAM ADJUSTMENT (2/2)
Temporary adjustment for
vehicles fitted with halogen
headlights
Open the bonnet and identify the mark-
ing B next to one of the front headlight
projectors.
For each headlight, using a screw-
driver, turn the screw 1 by a quarter
turn towards the - symbol to lower the
beams.
Return to the original position once your
trip is over: turn the screw 1 a quarter of
a turn towards the + symbol to raise the
beams.
When driving on the left in a left-
hand drive vehicle (or vice versa),
you must adjust your lights tempo-
rarily during your stay.
1
B
1.87
Special note
When driving the vehicle, the wiping
speed slows down whenever the ve-
hicle stops. For example, fast wiping
speed will slow to normal wiping speed.
As soon as the vehicle moves off,
wiping will return to the speed originally
selected.
If stalk 1 is operated, it overrides and
cancels the automatic function.
Vehicle fitted with intermittent
windscreen wipers
A single sweep
A short push will trigger one sweep
of the wipers.
B stop
C intermittent wiping
The wipers will pause for several
seconds between sweeps. It is
possible to change the time be-
tween sweeps by turning ring 2.
D slow continuous wiping
E fast continuous wiping
Positions A, C and D are accessible
with the ignition on. Position E is
accessible only when the engine is
running.
1
A
B
C
D
WINDSCREEN WASH, WIPE (1/6)
E
Efficiency of a wiper blade
Check the condition of the wiper
blades. How long they last depends
on you:
it must remain clean: clean the
blade and the screen regularly
with soapy water;
do not use it when the screen is
dry;
free it from the screen when it has
not been used for a long time.
In any event, replace them as soon
as they begin to lose efficiency: ap-
proximately every year (refer to the
information on “Wiper blades: re-
placement” in section 5).
Precautions for using the
wipers
In freezing or snowy weather,
clear the screen before starting
the wipers (risk of motor over-
heating);
ensure that no objects are ob-
structing the travel of the blade.
1
2
1.88
Vehicle fitted with front
windscreen wiper rain sensor
The rain sensor is located on the winds-
creen, in front of the interior rear-view
mirror.
A single sweep
A short push will trigger one sweep
of the wipers.
B stop
When activating automatic wiping
or when increasing sensitivity, one
sweep of the blades is performed.
Note:
the rain sensor is only intended
as a driving aid. In the event of re-
duced visibility, the driver should
manually activate the wipers;
In foggy weather or during snow-
falls, wiping is not automatically
triggered and remains under the
driver’s control;
in the event of temperatures
below zero, automatic wiping is
not activated when the vehicle
is started. It is automatically acti-
vated as soon as the vehicle ex-
ceeds a certain speed (approxi-
mately 5 mph (8 km/h));
do not activate automatic wiping
in dry weather;
fully de-ice the windscreen before
activating automatic wiping.
1
A
B
C
D
G
F
1
E
WINDSCREEN WASH, WIPE (2/6)
C automatic wiper function
When this position is selected, the
system detects water on the wind-
screen and triggers the wipers at a
suitable wiping speed. It is possi-
ble to change the triggering thresh-
old and the time sweeps by turning
ring 2:
F : minimum sensitivity
G : maximum sensitivity
The higher the sensitivity, the quic-
ker the wipers will react and the
faster the wipe.
2
1.89
D slow continuous wiping
E fast continuous wiping
Positions A and D are accessible
with the ignition on. Positions C
and E are accessible only with the
engine running.
Operating fault
In the event of a malfunction of the
automatic wiping, the wiper is set to
intermittent wiping. Contact an au-
thorised dealer.
The operation of the rain sensor can
be disturbed in the event of:
damaged windscreen wipers; a
film of water or traces left by a
blade in the sensor’s detection
zone may increase the response
time of the automatic wipers, or
increase the wiping frequency;
a windscreen with any chip or
crack level with the sensor, or a
windscreen covered in dust, dirt,
insects, ice, the use of washing
wax and water-repellent chemi-
cals; the windscreen wiper will
be less sensitive or may even not
react at all.
1
A
B
C
D
E
WINDSCREEN WASH, WIPE (3/6)
Special note
When driving the vehicle, the wiping
speed slows down whenever the ve-
hicle stops. For example, fast wiping
speed will slow to normal wiping speed.
As soon as the vehicle moves off,
wiping will return to the speed originally
selected.
If stalk 1 is operated, it overrides and
cancels the automatic function.
Precautions
In the event of ice, check whether the
blades are stuck to the windscreen
before operating the wiping mecha-
nism. If you activate the wipers while
the blades are stuck down with ice,
you may risk damaging both the
blade and the wiper motor.
Do not activate the wipers on a dry
screen. This will lead to the prema-
ture wear or damage to the blades.
1.90
Note:
After your intervention, to reposition the
blades correctly, make sure the blades
are resting on the windscreen, switch
on the ignition and activate the wiper
control.
Before any action involving
the windscreen (washing
the vehicle, de-icing,
cleaning the windscreen,
etc.) return stalk 1 to position B
(stop).
Risk of injury and/or damage.
In the event of obstacles on the
windscreen (dirt, snow, ice etc.),
clean the windscreen (including the
central area located behind the in-
terior rear view mirror) before oper-
ating the wipers (risk of motor over-
heating).
If an object is preventing a blade
from moving, it may stop function-
ing. Remove the obstacle and react-
ivate the wiper using the wiper stalk.
WINDSCREEN WASH, WIPE (4/6)
Specific front wiper position
(service position)
This position enables the blades to be
lifted to remove them from the winds-
creen.
It may be useful to:
to clean the blades;
to release the blades from the winds-
creen in winter;
replace the blades (please refer to
the information on “Wiper blades” in
Section 5).
With the ignition on and the engine off,
lower the windscreen wiper stalk fully
(fast continuous wipe position). The
wiper arms stop in a position away from
the bonnet.
To return the blades to position, make
sure they have been placed on the
windscreen, then move the stalk to po-
sition B (stop) with the ignition on.
Before switching on the ignition,
place the wipers on the windscreen.
Otherwise, there may a risk of damage
to the bonnet or the wipers when they
are switched on.
1
A
B
1.91
Note:
In temperatures below zero, the washer
liquid risks freezing to the windscreen,
thereby reducing visibility. Heat the
windscreen using the demister control
before cleaning.
Windscreen washer
With the ignition on, pull stalk 1 then
release.
A brief pull will trigger a single sweep
of the wipers, in addition to the wind-
screen washer.
A longer pull will trigger three sweeps
of the wipers followed, a few seconds
later, by a fourth, in addition to the wind-
screen washer.
When working in the engine
compartment, ensure that
the windscreen wiper stalk
is in position B (stop).
Risk of injury.
WINDSCREEN WASH, WIPE (5/6)
1
A
B
C
D
E
1.92
Note:
To ensure the headlight washers op-
erate correctly in winter, remove snow
from the jet trims and de-ice the jet
trims using an aerosol de-icer.
You are recommended to regularly
remove dirt encrusted on the headlight
glass.
When the minimum windscreen washer
fluid level is reached, the headlight
washer system may be deprimed.
Fill the windscreen washer fluid and
then activate the windscreen washer,
with the engine running, to reprime
the system.
1
A
B
C
D
E
WINDSCREEN WASH, WIPE (6/6)
Headlight washers
Headlights on
On equipped vehicles, hold stalk 1
pulled towards you for about 2 seconds
- the headlight washers and winds-
creen washers will be activated at the
same time.
The headlight washers are also activa-
ted after three prolonged movements
on the front windscreen washer control.
When working in the engine
compartment, ensure that
the windscreen wiper stalk
is in position B (stop).
Risk of injury.
1.93
REAR SCREEN WASH, WIPE (1/2)
1
3
Efficiency of a wiper blade
Check the condition of the wiper
blades. How long they last depends
on you:
it must remain clean: clean the
blade and the screen regularly
with soapy water;
do not use it when the screen is
dry;
free it from the screen when it has
not been used for a long time.
In any event, replace them as soon
as they begin to lose efficiency: ap-
proximately every year (refer to the
information on “Wiper blades: re-
placement” in section 5).
Precautions for using the
wipers
In freezing or snowy weather,
clear the screen before starting
the wipers (risk of motor over-
heating);
ensure that no objects are ob-
structing the travel of the blade.
Y
Rear screen wiper
With the ignition on, turn ring 3
on stalk 1 to align the symbol with
mark 2.
stop;
– intermittent wiping.
The wipers will pause for several
seconds between sweeps. Wiping
frequency varies with vehicle
speed;
slow continuous wiping.
To stop the operation, pivot ring 3 again.
Note: when washing using a roller
type car wash, return the ring 3 on the
stalk 1 to the stop position to deactivate
automatic wiping.
Follow usage recommendations.
Before any action involving
the rear screen (washing
the vehicle, de-icing, clean-
ing, etc.) return stalk 1 to
the stop position.
Risk of injury and/or damage.
2
Do not use the wiper arm to open or
close the tailgate.
1.94
Activation/deactivation of the rear
screen wiper
(depending on the vehicle)
Engaging reverse gear triggers inter-
mittent wiping (if the front wipers are in
operation). If your vehicle is fitted with
a vehicle settings customisation menu,
you can opt to activate or deactivate
this function. To do this, refer to the in-
formation on the “Vehicle settings cus-
tomisation menu” in Section 1; “Rear
wiping in reverse gear”.
REAR SCREEN WASH, WIPE (2/2)
p
Rear screen wash/wipe
With the ignition on, push and
hold stalk 1, then release.
A longer action will trigger three sweeps
of the wipers followed, a few seconds
later, by a fourth, in addition to the wind-
screen washer.
In the event of obstacles present on the
rear window (dirt, snow, etc.), the wiper
will try to sweep away all the obstacles.
If an obstacle prevents the blade from
moving, it can be stopped. Remove the
obstacle, wait for around 30 seconds
and reactivate the wiper using the wiper
stalk.
Precautions
In the event of ice, check that the
blades are not stuck to the wind-
screen before operating the wipers.
If you activate the wiper while the
blade is blocked by ice, you risk
damaging both the blade and the
wiping motor.
Do not operate the wipers on a dry
screen. This will lead to the prema-
ture wear or damage to the blades.
1
1.95
FUEL TANK (1/3)
A
3
2
Fuel grade
Use a high-grade fuel that complies
with the legislation in force in each
country and which must comply with
the specifications given on the label
on the cover A. Please refer to the in-
formation on “Engine specifications” in
Section 6.
Useful capacity of fuel tank:
– Approximately 12.1 gal (55 litres) or
14.3 gal (65 litres) for 2-wheel ver-
sions, depending on the vehicle;
14.3 gal (65 litres) for four-wheel
drive models.
To open the cover A, pull the control 1.
Use the cap holder 3 on the flap A
during filling to hold the cap 2 in place.
After filling, check that the cap and
cover are closed.
Petrol version
It is essential to use unleaded petrol.
The octane rating (RON) must comply
with the information given on the label
on the cover A. Refer to Section 6 for
information on “Engine specifications”.
Diesel version
Only use diesel fuel which complies
with the information on the label located
inside the cover A.
1
1.96
FUEL TANK (2/3)
Filling with fuel
With the ignition off, insert the nozzle
and insert it fully before turning it on to
fill the fuel tank (risk of splashing).
Keep the nozzle in this position through-
out the entire filling operation.
When the pump cuts out automatically
at the end of the filling procedure, a
maximum of two further filling attempts
may be made, as there must be suffi-
cient space in the fuel tank to allow for
expansion.
Make sure that no water enters the fuel
tank during filling. The cover A and its
surround must remain clean.
Petrol versions
Using leaded petrol will damage the
antipollution system and may lead to a
loss of warranty.
To ensure that the fuel tank is not filled
with leaded petrol, the fuel tank filler
neck consists of a restrictor fitted with
a safety system which only allows
a nozzle for unleaded petrol to be
used (at the pump).
Vehicle fitted with the Stop and
Start function
To fill up with fuel, the engine must
be stopped (and not on standby):
stop the engine (Please See
“Starting, stopping the engine” in
Section 2).
Fuel filler cap: this is spe-
cific.
If you have to replace it,
make sure it is identical
to the original cap. Contact an ap-
proved Dealer.
Never place the cap near a source
of heat or flame.
Do not wash the filler area with a
high-pressure washer.
Fuel types that conform to European
standards with which the engines of
vehicles sold in Europe are compat-
ible: refer to the “Engine specifica-
tions” in section 6.
Do not mix even small
amounts of petrol (un-
leaded or E85) with diesel.
Do not use ethanol-based
fuel if your vehicle is not compatible
with this fuel.
Do not add anything to the fuel (ad-
ditive, reagent, etc.) to prevent the
risk of damaging the engine.
1.97
FUEL TANK (3/3)
Persistent fuel odour
If you notice a persistent
fuel odour you should:
stop the vehicle as soon as traf-
fic conditions allow and switch off
the ignition;
switch on the hazard warning
lights and ask your passengers to
leave the vehicle and stay clear
of the traffic;
contact an approved Dealer.
No modifications what-
soever are permitted on
any part of the fuel supply
system (electronic units,
wiring, fuel circuit, injectors, pro-
tective covers, etc.) as this may be
dangerous (unless undertaken by
qualified Network personnel).
Running out of fuel on diesel
versions
Vehicles with key/remote control
Put the ignition key in “On” posi-
tion M (please see the information
on the “Ignition switch” in Section
2) and wait for a few minutes before
starting, to enable the fuel circuit to
be primed;
turn the key to position D. If the
engine does not start, repeat the pro-
cedure.
If the engine does not start after sev-
eral attempts, please contact an au-
thorised dealer.
Vehicles with RENAULT card
With the card RENAULT in the pas-
senger compartment, press the start
button 4 without pressing any of the
pedals. Wait a few minutes before start-
ing. This will enable the fuel circuit to
be primed. If the engine does not start,
repeat the procedure.
If the engine does not start after several
attempts, please contact an authorised
dealer.
4
1.98
Filling
Capacity of the fuel tank: 3.52 gal
(16 litres) approximately.
With the ignition switched off, open the
cover A, then unscrew the cap 1.
Note: Ammonium hydroxide vapour
may escape from the cap opening
when the tank temperature is high.
Please ensure that you comply with the
legislation of your country.
It is important to remember that failure
to respect regulations in force could
lead to legal action being taken against
the vehicle owner.
Operating principle
The reagent is intended for diesel en-
gines fitted with the SCR (selective cat-
alytic reduction) system.
The use of reagents reduces exhaust
emissions by transforming the pollut-
ants into water vapour and nitrogen.
Reagent quality
Use only reagents which conform
to standard ISO 22241 and in accord-
ance with the mark on the tank filler
cap.
REAGENT TANK (1/4)
A
1
Fuel filler cap: this is spe-
cific.
If you have to replace it,
make sure it is identical
to the original cap. Contact an ap-
proved Dealer. Do not wash the filler
area with a high pressure washer.
Vehicle fitted with the Stop and
Start function
To fill up with reagent, the engine
must be stopped (and not on
standby): stop the engine (please
see “Starting, stopping the engine”
in Section 2).
If the “XXX MILES (XXX
KM) Failure Top up AdBlue”
warning message appears,
fill the reagent tank and
refer to the filling instructions.
Risk of immobilisation of the ve-
hicle.
1.99
In extreme cold weather conditions
Fill the reagent tank as soon as pos-
sible when the warning light
and the message “Top up AdBlue
before 1200 km” are displayed.
The reagent fluid freezes below about
-10°C.
In these conditions, do not attempt fill-
ing when the fluid is frozen. In the event
of needing to top up or fill the tank
with reagent (
on), park the ve-
hicle in a hotter location if possible so
that the reagent becomes liquid again.
Otherwise, have a qualified profes-
sional top up or fill up with reagent fluid.
Precautions for use
When filling, handle the reagent care-
fully.
They can damage clothes, shoes,
bodywork components etc.
If the reagent overflows, or contami-
nates any paintwork, clean the affected
area quickly with plenty of cold water
and a soft cloth.
Note: If the reagent crystallises, use a
soft sponge.
The reagent must not come
into contact with eyes or
skin. If it does, wash the af-
fected area with plenty of
cold water. If necessary, consult a
doctor.
REAGENT TANK (2/4)
No work whatsoever is
permitted on any part of
the system. To prevent
damage, only qualified per-
sonnel from our network may work
on the system.
After filling the reagent tank, check
that the cap and cover are closed,
start the engine and WAIT 10 sec-
onds with the vehicle stationary,
engine running before setting off
again.
If this operation is not carried out,
the filling of the tank will not be
taken into account automatically
until after several dozens of minutes
of driving.
The message “--- Top up AdBlue”
and/or the warning lights will con-
tinue to appear until the filling has
been registered by the system.
1.100
REAGENT TANK (3/4)
Maintenance/Range
The information displayed on the instrument panel may be accompanied by a beep.
Indicator
lights
Message What to do?
“AdBlue Level Correct”
“Top Up AdBlue before 2400 km”
When the message is displayed when the ignition is switched
on, you have less than 1,488 miles (2,400 km) range.
Fill or have an Approved Dealer fill or top up the reagent in
the tank.
appears.
“Top up AdBlue before 1200 km”
When the message is displayed when the ignition is switched
on, you have between 744 miles (1,200 km) and 496 miles
(800 km) range.
Fill or have an Approved Dealer fill or top up the reagent in
the tank.
appears.
“XXX MILES (XXX KM) Failure Top up
AdBlue”
The message is displayed when the ignition is switched on and
is repeated:
Approximately every 62 miles (100 km), you have between
about 496 miles (800 km) and 124 miles (200 km) range;
Approximately every 31 miles (50 km), you have less than
124 miles (200 km) range.
In any event, fill or have an Approved Dealer fill the reagent
tank as soon as possible.
appears.
“0 MILES (0 KM) Failure Top up AdBlue”
The engine will not start.
To restart, you must fill the reagent tank yourself.
1.101
REAGENT TANK (4/4)
System fault
When the indicator lights light up, this may be accompanied by a beep.
Indicator lights Message Readings
and © come on.
“Check anti-pollution system”
Indicates a fault in the system. Contact your approved
dealer as soon as possible.
and © come on.
“XXX MILES (XXX KM) Failure antipollu-
tion”
Indicates a system fault and that in less than
496 miles (800 km) it will become impossible to
restart the vehicle.
These warnings are repeated:
Every 62 miles (100 km) until there is around
124 miles (200 km) left before the vehicle cannot
be restarted;
Every 31 miles (50 km) when there is less than
124 miles (200 km) left before the vehicle cannot
be restarted.
Contact your approved dealer as soon as possible.
and © come on.
“0 KM Failure antipollution”
Indicates that after the ignition is switched off the ve-
hicle will not restart. Call an approved Dealer.
1.102
2.1
Section 2: Driving
(Advice on use relating to fuel economy and the environment)
Running in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2
Ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3
Starting, stopping the engine: vehicle with key/remote control unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4
Starting, stopping the engine: vehicle with RENAULT card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5
Stop and Start Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.8
Special features of petrol versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.12
Particle filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.13
Special features of diesel versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.14
Gear lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.15
Handbrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.16
Electronic parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.17
ECO driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.20
Maintenance and antipollution advice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.25
Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.26
Tyre pressure monitoring system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.27
Driver correction devices/aids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.30
Transmission: 4-wheel drive (4WD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.40
Lane departure warning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.44
Blind spot warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.47
Speed limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.51
Speeding alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.54
Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.57
Parking distance control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.61
Reversing camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.66
Assisted parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.68
Automatic gearbox. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.72
2.2
RUNNING IN
Petrol version
For the first 600 miles (1,000 km), do
not exceed 78 mph (130 km/h) in the
highest gear, or 3,000 to 3,500 rpm.
You may only expect top performance
from your vehicle after approximately
1,800 miles (3,000 km).
Service intervals: refer to the
Maintenance Document for your vehi-
cle.
Diesel version
For the first 1,000 miles (1,500 km),
do not exceed 80 mph (130 km/h) in
the highest gear, or 2,500 rpm. After
completing this mileage you may drive
faster, although you may only expect
top performance after approximately
3,600 miles (6,000 km).
During the running in period, do not ac-
celerate hard while the engine is still
cold and do not let the engine over-rev.
Service intervals: refer to the
Maintenance Document for your vehi-
cle.
2.3
Ignition position M.
The ignition is switched on:
Start position D
If the engine fails to start at the first
attempt, the key must be turned back
before the starter can be activated
again. Release the key as soon as the
engine starts.
Note: on diesel versions, several sec-
onds may pass between turning the
key and the engine starting to allow for
engine preheating.
Ignition switch
“Stop and steering lock” position St
To lock: remove the key and turn the
steering wheel until the steering column
locks.
To unlock: turn the key and the steering
wheel slightly.
“Accessories” position A
When the ignition is switched off, any
accessories (radio, etc.) will continue to
function.
IGNITION SWITCH: vehicle with key
2.4
STARTING, STOPPING THE ENGINE: vehicle with key
Starting the engine
Petrol versions
Activate the starter without ac-
celerating;
release the key as soon as the
engine starts.
É
Diesel versions
Turn the ignition key to the
“Ignition on” position M, and hold
this position until the engine pre-
heating light goes off;
turn the key to starter position D
without depressing the accel-
erator pedal;
release the key as soon as the
engine starts.
Special note: if starting the engine
when the outdoor temperature is very
low (below - 10 ° C): hold down the
clutch pedal until the engine starts.
Never start your vehicle
while freewheeling on a
gradient. Risk of non-ac-
tivation of power-assisted
steering.
There is a risk of accidents.
Never switch off the igni-
tion before the vehicle has
stopped completely. Once
the engine has stopped, the
brake servo, power-assisted steer-
ing, etc. and the passive safety de-
vices such as air bags and preten-
sioners will no longer operate.
Drivers responsibility
when parking or stopping
the vehicle
Never leave an animal,
child or adult who is not self-suffi-
cient alone in your vehicle, even for
a short time.
They may pose a risk to themselves
or to others by starting the engine,
activating equipment such as the
electric windows or locking the
doors, for example.
Also, in hot and/or sunny weather,
please remember that the tempera-
ture inside the passenger compart-
ment increases very quickly.
RISK OF DEATH OR SERIOUS
INJURY.
Stopping the engine
With the engine idling, turn the key to
the “Stop” position St.
2.5
STARTING, STOPPING THE ENGINE: vehicle with RENAULT CARD (1/3)
The RENAULT card must be inserted in
detection zone 1.
To start:
vehicles with an automatic gearbox,
place the lever in position P, depress
the brake pedal and press button 2;
vehicles with a manual gearbox,
depress the brake or clutch pedal
and press the button 2. If a gear is
engaged, the vehicle may only be
started by depressing the clutch
pedal.
“Hands-free” starting with
the tailgate open
In this case, the RENAULT card should
not be located in the boot, to avoid any
risk of loss.
2
1
Special features
If one of starting conditions is not ap-
plied, the message “Press brake +
START” or “Press clutch + START”
or “Select P” is displayed on the in-
strument panel;
in some cases, it will be necessary to
move the steering wheel while press-
ing the start button 1 to assist in un-
locking the steering column. A mes-
sage on the instrument panel “Turn
steeringwheel + START” warns of
this.
Drivers responsibility
when parking or stopping
the vehicle
Never leave an animal,
child or adult who is not self-suffi-
cient alone in your vehicle, even for
a short time.
They may pose a risk to themselves
or to others by starting the engine,
activating equipment such as the
electric windows or locking the
doors, for example.
Also, in hot and/or sunny weather,
please remember that the tempera-
ture inside the passenger compart-
ment increases very quickly.
RISK OF DEATH OR SERIOUS
INJURY.
2.6
STARTING, STOPPING THE ENGINE: vehicle with RENAULT CARD (2/3)
Operating faults
In certain cases, the RENAULT “hands-
free” card may not work:
when the RENAULT card battery is
drained, etc.;
near to appliances operating on the
same frequency as the card (moni-
tor, mobile phone, video game, etc.);
vehicle located in a high electromag-
netic radiation zone.
The message “Place card close START
and push” appears on the instrument
panel.
2
Accessories function
(switching on the ignition)
Once you have gained access to your
vehicle, you may use some of its func-
tions (radio, navigation, wipers, etc.).
To use the other functions, with the
RENAULT card in the passenger com-
partment, press button 2 without press-
ing the pedals.
Depress the brake or clutch pedal, then
place the RENAULT 3 card (logo side)
in contact with the start button 2 for
around 2 seconds. Press the 2 button
to start the vehicle. The message goes
out.
3
Never leave your vehicle
with the RENAULT card in
the reader or in the pas-
senger compartment while
there is a child (or an animal) in the
vehicle, even for a short while.
They may pose a risk to themselves
or to others by starting the engine.
Risk of serious injury.
Never switch off the igni-
tion before the vehicle has
stopped completely. Once
the engine has stopped, the
brake servo, power-assisted steer-
ing, etc. and the passive safety de-
vices such as air bags and preten-
sioners will no longer operate.
2.7
STARTING, STOPPING THE ENGINE: vehicle with RENAULT CARD (3/3)
If the RENAULT card is no longer in the
passenger compartment or if the card
battery is low when you try to switch
the engine off, the message “No key-
card Press and hold” appears on the in-
strument panel: press the button 2 for
longer than two seconds. If the card is
no longer in the passenger compart-
ment, make sure you can retrieve it
before pressing and holding the button.
Without the RENAULT card, you will
not be able to restart the vehicle.
With the engine switched off, any ac-
cessories being used (radio, etc.) will
continue to function for approximately
10 minutes.
When the driver’s door is opened, the
accessories stop working.
Conditions for stopping the
engine
The vehicle must stationary, with the
lever positioned in N or P for vehicles
with an automatic transmission.
With the RENAULT card in the vehicle,
press the 2 button: the engine will stop.
The steering column is locked when the
driver’s door is opened or the vehicle
is locked.
When you leave your vehi-
cle, especially if you have
your RENAULT card with
you, check that the engine
is completely switched off.
2
Drivers responsibility
when parking or stopping
the vehicle
Never leave an animal,
child or adult who is not self-suffi-
cient alone in your vehicle, even for
a short time.
They may pose a risk to themselves
or to others by starting the engine,
activating equipment such as the
electric windows or locking the
doors, for example.
Also, in hot and/or sunny weather,
please remember that the tempera-
ture inside the passenger compart-
ment increases very quickly.
RISK OF DEATH OR SERIOUS
INJURY.
Never switch off the igni-
tion before the vehicle has
stopped completely. Once
the engine has stopped, the
brake servo, power-assisted steer-
ing, etc. and the passive safety de-
vices such as air bags and preten-
sioners will no longer operate.
2.8
For manual gearboxes:
the gearbox is in neutral;
and
the clutch pedal is released. If the
warning light
flashes, this
means that the clutch pedal is not
sufficiently released;
and
the vehicle speed is less than ap-
proximately 2 mph (3 km/h).
For all vehicles:
Warning light
on the instru-
ment panel is lit when the engine is on
standby.
The vehicle equipment remain opera-
tional while the engine is stopped.
FUNCTION STOP AND START (1/4)
This system enables a reduced fuel
consumption and lower greenhouse
gas emissions.
The system is activated automatically
when the vehicle is started.
While driving, the system stops the
engine (standby) when the vehicle is
at a standstill (traffic jam, traffic lights,
etc).
Conditions for engine
standby
The vehicle has set off from where it
was parked;
For automatic gearboxes:
the gearbox is in position D, M or N;
and
the brake pedal is depressed (suffi-
ciently hard);
and
the accelerator pedal is not de-
pressed;
and
the speed is zero for around
1 second.
The engine remains on standby if posi-
tion P is selected, or if position N is se-
lected with the handbrake engaged and
the brake pedal released.
If the engine is put in
standby, the electronic
parking brake (depending
on the vehicle) is not ap-
plied automatically.
Engine on standby - braking
assistance is no longer op-
erational.
If the engine stalls while the system
is in operation, pressing the clutch
pedal right down will start it again.
Keep your vehicle station-
ary when the engine is
on standby (shown by the
warning light
on the
instrument panel).
Before getting out of the
vehicle, you must switch
off the ignition (please see
section on “Starting, stop-
ping the engine”).
2.9
Conditions for coming out of
engine standby
For automatic gearboxes:
the brake pedal is released, position
D or M engaged or,
the brake pedal is released, position
N engaged and the handbrake off, or
the brake pedal is pressed again,
with position P engaged or position
N engaged with the handbrake ap-
plied, or
position R is engaged or,
the accelerator pedal is depressed
or,
in manual mode, the gear lever is
moved towards + or -.
For manual gearboxes:
the gearbox is in neutral and the
clutch pedal is slightly depressed, or
the engine is in gear and the clutch
pedal is pressed right down.
To fill up with fuel, the engine must
be stopped (and not on standby):
always stop the engine (please see
“Starting, stopping the engine”).
FUNCTION STOP AND START (2/4)
Preventing the engine from
standing by
In certain situations, such as negotiat-
ing a crossroads for instance, it is pos-
sible (with the system activated) to keep
the engine running so as to be ready to
move off quickly.
Automatic gearbox:
Keep the vehicle stationary without
pressing too hard on the brake pedal.
Manual gearbox:
Keep the clutch pedal pressed right
down.
Special note: depending on the vehi-
cle, if you switch off the ignition when
the engine is on standby, the warning
light
Ä is displayed for a few sec-
onds on the instrument panel.
2.10
FUNCTION STOP AND START (3/4)
Conditions preventing the
standby of the engine
Certain conditions prevent the system
from using the engine standby function,
including when:
for vehicles equipped with a
RENAULT card:
the driver’s door is not closed;
the driver’s seatbelt is not fastened;
for all vehicles:
reverse gear is engaged;
the bonnet is not locked;
the outdoor temperature is too low
or too high (less than around 5 °C or
higher than around 35 °C);
the battery is not sufficiently charged;
if available, “4WD Lock” mode is
activated (please see the section
“Transmission: 4-wheel drive (4WD)”
in Section 2);
the difference between the vehicle
interior temperature and the auto-
matic climate control instruction is
too high;
parking distance control is in opera-
tion;
for vehicles with automatic gear-
boxes, the gradient is steeper than
approximately 12%;
the “Clear View” function is activated
(please see “Automatic Climate
Control” in Section 3);
the engine temperature is too low;
the emission control system is being
regenerated;
or
– ...
Warning light
is displayed on the
instrument panel. This notifies you that
engine standby is not available.
Special cases for vehicles
with a RENAULT card
With the engine on standby (traffic jam,
traffic lights, etc.), if the driver unfas-
tens the seat belt and opens the driv-
er’s door, or gets out of the seat, the
ignition is switched off.
The assisted parking brake is applied
automatically.
To restart and reactivate the Stop and
Start system, start the engine (please
refer to the information on “Starting,
stopping the engine” in Section 2).
Special cases of vehicles
with a key
With the engine on standby (traffic
jam, traffic lights, etc.), if you get out of
the vehicle, a beep warns you that the
engine is on standby and has not been
stopped.
Deactivate the Stop and
Start function for any opera-
tion performed in the engine
compartment.
2.11
THE STOP AND START function (4/4)
Special feature of the automatic
engine re-start
Under certain conditions, the engine
can restart on its own in order to guar-
antee your safety and comfort.
This can occur especially when:
the outdoor temperature is too low
or too high (less than around 5 °C or
higher than around 35 °C);
the “Clear View” function is activated
(please see “Automatic Climate
Control” in Section 3);
the battery is not sufficiently charged;
the vehicle speed is above 3 mph
(5 km/h) (downhill slope, etc.);
repeated pressing on the brake
pedal or braking system require-
ment;
– ...
1
2
For vehicles fitted with a manual gear-
box, the restarting of the engine may be
stopped if the clutch pedal is released
too quickly and a gear is engaged.
Deactivating, activating the
function
Press 1 to deactivate the function.
Note: With the engine on standby,
press switch 1 to automatically re-
start the engine.
The message “Stop & Start deacti-
vated” will appear on the instrument
panel and the integrated warning light 2
on the switch will light up. Pressing
again will reactivate the system. The
message “Stop & Start activated” will
appear on the instrument panel and the
integrated warning light 2 on switch 1
will go out.
The system is automatically reacti-
vated each time the vehicle is started
(see “Starting, stopping the engine” in
Section 2).
Operating faults
When the message “Check Stop &
Start” appears on the instrument panel
and the integrated warning light 2 lights
up on the switch 1, the system is deac-
tivated.
Please consult an authorised dealer.
Before getting out of the
vehicle, you must switch
off the ignition (please see
section on “Starting, stop-
ping the engine”).
Special feature of vehicles with
a key: for some of these condi-
tions the automatic restarting of the
engine is inhibited if a front door is
open.
2.12
SPECIAL FEATURES OF PETROL VERSIONS (1/2)
The following operating conditions:
– driving for long periods when the low
fuel level warning light is lit;
– using leaded petrol;
– using fuel or lubrication additives
which are not approved.
Or operating faults such as:
faulty ignition system, running out of
fuel or disconnected spark plugs re-
sulting in the engine misfiring or cut-
ting out when driving;
– loss of power,
as they may cause the catalytic con-
verter to overheat and thus reduce its
efficiency, or damage it irreparably
and cause heat damage to the vehi-
cle.
If you notice any of the above operating
faults, have the necessary repairs car-
ried out as soon as possible by an ap-
proved Dealer.
These faults may be avoided by regu-
larly taking your vehicle to an approved
Dealer at the intervals specified in the
Maintenance document.
Starting problems
To avoid damaging the catalytic con-
verter, do not keep trying to start the
engine (using the start button, or by
pushing or towing the vehicle) without
having identified and corrected the
starting fault.
If the fault cannot be identified, do not
keep trying to start the engine, but con-
tact an approved Dealer.
Do not park the vehicle or
run the engine in locations
where combustible sub-
stances or materials such
as grass or leaves can come into
contact with the hot exhaust system.
2.13
SPECIAL FEATURES OF PETROL VERSIONS (2/2)/PARTICLE FILTER
If, after approximately 20 minutes, the
indicator light remains lit, consult an
Approved Dealer.
Note: if the vehicle is stopped before
the warning light disappears, you will
have to restart the process from the be-
ginning.
Particle filter
The particle filter is used in the treat-
ment of exhaust gases from petrol en-
gines.
When driving, depending on the grade
of fuel used, it is possible that white
smoke may be emitted. This is due to
the exhaust particle filter being cleaned
automatically, and does not affect the
way the vehicle runs.
Depending on the vehicle, the warning
light
displayed on the instrument
panel indicates that the filter is becom-
ing clogged and requires cleaning. To
clean it, when the
warning light
appears, and as traffic conditions and
speed limits allow, drive at between
about 31 mph (50 km/h) and 68 mph
(110 km/h) until the light goes out.
After between approximately 5 and
20 minutes, the warning light should go
out.
Warning light ® re-
quires you to stop immedi-
ately, for your own safety,
as soon as traffic conditions
allow. Switch off the engine and do
not restart it. Contact an approved
Dealer.
If the filter becomes saturated, the
© warning light and, depending
on the vehicle, the
warning light
will appear on the instrument panel, ac-
companied by the message “Check in-
jection”. In this case, please consult an
Authorised Dealer.
If the
® warning light and, depend-
ing on the vehicle, the
warning
light appears, accompanied by the
“Engine failure hazard” message, stop
the vehicle, switch off the engine and
contact an Approved Dealer.
2.14
SPECIAL FEATURES OF DIESEL VERSIONS
Diesel engine speed
Diesel engines are fitted with an injec-
tion pump which prevents the engine
speed being exceeded irrespective of
the gear selected.
If the message “Check antipollution
system” is displayed along with warn-
ing lights
Ä and ©, consult an
authorised dealer immediately.
When driving, depending on the fuel
grade used, it is possible that white
smoke may be emitted.
This is due to the exhaust particle filter
being cleaned automatically, and does
not affect the way the vehicle runs.
Running out of fuel
If the tank has been completely
drained, the system must be reprimed
after the tank is refilled: See “Fuel
tank” in section 1 before restarting the
engine.
Do not park the vehicle or
run the engine in locations
where combustible sub-
stances or materials such
as grass or leaves can come into
contact with the hot exhaust system.
Precautions to be taken in
winter
To avoid any faults in icy weather:
ensure that the battery is always fully
charged,
always keep the diesel tank rela-
tively full to avoid water vapour con-
densing in it and accumulating at the
bottom of the tank.
Engine smoke opacity labels
You will find 1 information on the A label
stuck inside the engine compartment.
1 Diesel exhaust emissions.
A
1
2.15
Gear lever
Vehicles with manual gearbox: refer
to the grid on the gear lever knob 1.
Vehicles with an automatic gear-
box: refer to the information on the
“Automatic gearbox” in Section 2.
GEAR LEVER
An impact to the under-
side of the vehicle while
manoeuvring (e.g.: strik-
ing a post, raised kerb or
other street furniture) may result in
damage to the vehicle (e.g.: defor-
mation of an axle).
To avoid any risk of accident, have
your vehicle checked by an ap-
proved Dealer.
Selecting reverse gear
The ring 2 has to be lifted up to the gear
lever knob to select reverse gear.
The reversing lights will come on as
soon as reverse gear is selected with
the ignition on.
Note: depending on the vehicle, if the
dipped beam headlights are on, the
front fog lights come on simultaneously
when reverse gear is selected.
1
2
2.16
HANDBRAKE
Handbrake
To release:
Pull lever 2 up slightly, press button 1
and then lower the lever to the floor.
The red warning light on the instrument
panel will come on if you are driving
with an incorrectly released handbrake.
To apply:
Pull lever 2 upwards. Check that the
vehicle is immobilised. The warning
light
D on the instrument panel will
come on.
Make sure that the hand-
brake is properly released
when driving (red indicator
light off), otherwise over-
heating, or even damage, may
occur.
2
1
When stationary, and de-
pending on the slope and/or
vehicle load, it may be nec-
essary to pull up the hand-
brake at least two extra notches and
engage a gear (1
st
or reverse gear)
for vehicles with a manual gearbox
or position P for vehicles with an au-
tomatic gearbox.
2.17
ELECTRONIC PARKING BRAKE (1/3)
Note:
To indicate that the electronic parking
brake is released, a beep sounds and
the message “Apply parking brake” ap-
pears on the instrument panel:
with the engine running: when the
driver’s door is opened;
with the engine switched off (eg.
when the engine stalls): when a front
door is opened.
In this case, pull and release switch 1 to
apply the assisted parking brake.
Assisted release of the parking
brake
The brake will be released as soon as
the vehicle starts and accelerates.
Assisted operation
The assisted parking brake immobilises
the vehicle when stopping the engine
(and not when the engine is on
standby for vehicles fitted with the
Stop and Start function). Please refer
to “Starting, stopping the engine” and
“Stop and Start function” in Section 2.
In all other instances, e.g. engine stal-
ling, the electronic parking brake is not
applied automatically. Manual mode
must be used.
For certain country-specific model ver-
sions, the assisted brake application
function is not activated. Refer to the
information on “Manual operation”.
To confirm that the electronic parking
brake is applied, the message “Parking
brake on” and warning light
}
on the instrument panel and warning
light 2 on the switch 1 light up.
After the engine is switched off, indi-
cator light 2 goes out several minutes
after the electronic parking brake has
been applied and indicator light
}
goes out when the vehicle is locked.
Before leaving the vehi-
cle, check that the assisted
parking brake is fully ap-
plied. Warning light 2 on
switch 1 and warning light
}
on the instrument panel light up to
show that the parking brake is ap-
plied but go out when the doors are
locked.
2
1
2.18
ELECTRONIC PARKING BRAKE (2/3)
Special cases
To park on a slope or while towing a
trailer, for example, pull switch 1 for
a few seconds to gain the maximum
braking.
To park the vehicle without applying the
electronic parking brake (if there is a
risk of freezing, for example):
with the engine running, while si-
multaneously depressing the brake
pedal and the switch 1, stop the
engine (not standby for vehicles
fitted with Stop and Start);
with a gear or position P engaged,
release the brake pedal and the
switch 1.
For vehicles fitted with a Stop and Start
function, with the engine on standby,
the electronic parking brake is automat-
ically activated if the driver unfastens
their seat belt and opens the driver’s
door or gets out of their seat.
Brief stop
To manually activate the electronic
parking brake, (when stopping at a red
light, or stopping when the engine is
running, etc.): pull and release switch 1.
The brake is released as soon as the
vehicle is started up again.
Manual operation
You can control the electronic parking
brake manually.
Applying the electronic parking
brake
Pull switch 1. Warning light 2 and warn-
ing light
} on the instrument panel
light up.
Releasing the electronic parking
brake
With the ignition on, depress the brake
pedal then press switch 1: warning
light 2 and warning light
} go out.
Special feature relating to
the Stop and Start function:
in the event of unfastening
the driver’s seat belt before
the engine goes to standby using
the Stop and Start function, make
sure the parking brake is engaged:
warning light
} will come on
the instrument panel to confirm this.
Risk of loss of immobilisation.
2
1
2.19
Operating faults
If there is a fault, the © warning
light illuminates on the instrument
panel accompanied by the “Check
parking brake” message and, in
some cases, the
} warning
light.
Please contact an authorised dealer
as soon as possible.
If there is an assisted parking brake
fault, the warning light
® comes
on, along with the message “Braking
system fault”, a beep and, in some
cases, the warning light
}.
This means that you must stop as
soon as traffic conditions allow.
Versions with an automatic
gearbox
For safety reasons, automatic release
is deactivated when the driver’s door
is open or not shut properly and the
engine is running (in order to prevent
the vehicle from moving without the
driver). The “Release parking brake
manually” message appears on the
instrument panel when the driver de-
presses the accelerator.
ELECTRONIC PARKING BRAKE (3/3)
It is therefore essential to
immobilise the vehicle by
engaging first gear (manual
gearbox) or position P (au-
tomatic gearbox). If the slope re-
quires it, chock the vehicle.
Never leave your vehicle
without moving the selector
lever to position P. This is
because when the vehicle
is stationary with the engine running
and a gear engaged, the vehicle
may begin to move if you accele-
rate.
There is a risk of accidents.
If no lights or sounds are
apparent, this indicates
a fault in the instrument
panel. This indicates that
it is essential to stop immediately
(as soon as traffic conditions allow).
Ensure that the vehicle is correctly
immobilised and contact an appro-
ved Dealer.
In the event of message
“Electric failure DANGER”
or “Check battery”, manu-
ally activate the electronic
parking brake by pulling switch 1 (or
position the gear lever in P for au-
tomatic gearboxes) before stopping
the engine.
Risk of loss of immobilisation of the
vehicle.
Contact an authorised dealer.
2.20
DRIVING ADVICE, ECO-DRIVING (1/5)
1
Gear change indicator 2
Depending on the vehicle, to obtain op-
timum consumption levels, a warning
light on the instrument panel lets you
know the best time to move up or down
a gear:
Š move up a gear;
move down a gear.
If you regularly follow this indicator, you
will reduce your vehicle’s fuel consump-
tion.
Fuel consumption is accredited in ac-
cordance with a standard regulatory
method. Identical for all manufactur-
ers, this enables vehicles to be com-
pared with one another. Consumption
in real time depends on vehicle usage
conditions, the equipment fitted and the
user’s driving style. To optimise fuel
consumption, please refer to the follow-
ing advice.
Depending on the vehicle, you will have
various functions which enable you to
lower your fuel consumption:
– the rev counter;
– gear change indicator;
– the driving style indicator;
the journey record and eco-driving
advice via the multimedia screen;
– ECO mode.
If fitted on the vehicle, the navigation
system provides additional information.
On the instrument panel
The information display can be organ-
ised and customised based on the in-
strument panel customisation style se-
lected from the multimedia screen.
Rev counter with ECO zone 1
Driving in the ECO zone helps you op-
timise fuel consumption under most cir-
cumstances.
2
2.21
DRIVING ADVICE, ECO-DRIVING (2/5)
4
3
On the multifunction screen
Journey record
Once the engine is switched off, you
will see “Journey record” displayed on
the screen 4, enabling you to view in-
formation relating to your last journey.
This indicates:
– average fuel consumption;
number of miles/kilometres travelled;
number of miles/kilometres saved.
This corresponds to driving without
fuel consumption (deceleration and/
or foot off the accelerator pedal).
An overall rating from 0 to 100 is dis-
played to let you assess your eco driv-
ing performance. The higher the rating,
the lower the fuel consumption.
Eco advice is given to help improve
your performance.
With your favourite journeys saved,
you can compare your performance
between trips and the performance of
other vehicle users.
For more information, please see the
multimedia system instructions.
Driving style indicator 3
Informs you about the driving style
adopted in real time. You will be notified
by indicator 3.
The more petals there are on indica-
tor 3, the smoother and more economi-
cal your driving.
If you regularly monitor this indicator,
you will reduce your vehicle’s fuel con-
sumption.
To activate/deactivate the driving style
indicator, please see the multimedia
system instructions.
2.22
DRIVING ADVICE, ECO-DRIVING (3/5)
ECO mode
ECO mode is a function which opti-
mises fuel consumption. It acts upon
certain power consuming systems in
the vehicle (heating, air conditioning,
power-assisted steering etc.) and on
certain driving actions (acceleration,
gear changing, cruise control, deceler-
ation etc.).
Limiting acceleration enables low fuel
consumption in urban and surrounding
areas. When ECO mode is in use, it is
normal to notice a change in the heat-
ing level.
Activating the function
The function can be activated:
– by pressing switch 4.
Depending on the vehicle, from the
navigation menu on the multimedia
screen (please refer to the multime-
dia instructions).
The warning light
comes on on
the instrument panel to confirm activa-
tion.
Disabling the function
Press switch 4.
The warning light
goes out on
the instrument panel to confirm deac-
tivation.
While driving, it is possible to leave the
ECO mode temporarily in order to im-
prove engine performance.
For this, depress the accelerator pedal
firmly and fully.
ECO mode is reactivated when you
take pressure off the accelerator pedal.
4
2.23
Do not overrev the engine in the in-
termediate gears.
You should always use the highest
gear possible.
– Avoid sudden acceleration.
Brake as little as possible. If you an-
ticipate an obstacle or bend in ad-
vance, you may then simply release
the accelerator pedal.
Do not try to maintain the same
speed up a hill, accelerate no more
than you would on flat ground. Keep
your foot in the same position on the
accelerator pedal.
Double declutching and accelerating
before switching off are unnecessary
in modern vehicles.
Driving advice, Eco-driving
Behaviour
Drive carefully for the first few miles
until the engine reaches its normal
operating temperature, rather than
let it warm up while the vehicle is sta-
tionary.
– Speed is expensive.
Dynamic driving with a lot of frequent
acceleration and braking is expen-
sive on fuel in comparison to the time
saved.
DRIVING ADVICE, ECO-DRIVING (4/5)
Obstructions to the driver
On the driver’s side, only
use mats suitable for the
vehicle, attached with the
pre-fitted components, and check
the fitting regularly. Do not lay one
mat on top of another.
There is a risk of wedging the
pedals.
– Bad weather, flooded roads:
Do not drive through
floods if the water is
above the lower edge of
the wheel rims.
2.24
DRIVING ADVICE, ECO-DRIVING (5/5)
Advice on use
– Favour the ECO mode.
Electricity is fuel; switch off all the
electrical components which are
not really needed. However (safety
first), keep your lights on when the
visibility is bad (“see and be seen”).
Use the air vents. Driving with the
windows open at 60 mph (100 km/h)
will increase fuel consumption by
4%.
Never fill the fuel tank right to the
brim to avoid overflow.
In vehicles fitted with air condi-
tioning, it is normal to observe an
increase in fuel consumption (espe-
cially in urban conditions) when it is
used. For vehicles fitted with manual
air conditioning, switch off the system
when it is not required.
Recommendations for reducing
consumption and therefore help-
ing to preserve the environment:
If the vehicle has been parked in the
sun, open the doors for a few mo-
ments to let the hot air escape before
starting the engine.
– Do not leave an empty roof rack
fitted to the vehicle.
It is better to fit a trailer for bulky ob-
jects.
When towing a caravan, fit a wind
deflector and adjust it carefully.
Avoid using the car for door-to-door
calls (short journeys with long waits
in between) because the engine
never reaches its normal operating
temperature.
Tyres
An underinflated tyre increases fuel
consumption.
Opt for the highest speed pressure
or the pressure recommended to op-
timise fuel consumption indicated
on edge of the driver’s door (please
refer to the information on “Tyre infla-
tion pressure” in Section 4).
The use of non-recommended tyres
can increase fuel consumption.
2.25
MAINTENANCE AND ANTIPOLLUTION ADVICE
Your vehicle complies with criteria for
recycling and recovering vehicles at the
end of their service life, which entered
into force in 2015.
Some parts of your vehicle have there-
fore been designed to facilitate future
recycling.
These parts are easy to remove so
that they can be recovered and reproc-
essed by recycling companies.
By virtue of its design, moderate fuel
consumption and initial settings, your
vehicle also conforms to current anti-
pollution regulations. The manufac-
turer is actively striving to reduce pol-
lutant exhaust gas emissions and to
save energy. But the fuel consumption
of your vehicle and the level of pollutant
exhaust gas emissions are also your
responsibility. Ensure that it is main-
tained and used correctly.
Maintenance
It is important to remember that fail-
ure to respect antipollution regulations
could lead to legal action being taken
against the vehicle owner.
In addition, replacing engine, fuel
supply system and exhaust compo-
nents with parts other than those origi-
nally recommended by the manufac-
turer may alter your vehicle so that it
no longer complies with anti-pollution
regulations.
Have your vehicle adjusted and
checked by an authorised dealer, in ac-
cordance with the instructions given in
your maintenance schedule: they will
have all the equipment necessary for
ensuring that your vehicle is maintained
to its original standard.
Engine adjustments
Spark plugs: for optimum condi-
tions of use, output and performance
the specifications laid down by our
Design Department must be strictly
applied.
If the spark plugs have to be changed,
use the make, type and gap specified
for your vehicle’s engine. Contact an
authorised dealer for this.
Ignition and idle speed: no adjust-
ment is needed.
Air filter, fuel filter: a choked ele-
ment will reduce efficiency. It must
be replaced.
Exhaust gas monitoring
system
The exhaust gas monitoring system will
detect any operating faults in the vehi-
cle’s antipollution system.
If this system malfunctions, toxic sub-
stances may be released into the at-
mosphere or damage may occur.
Ä
This warning light on the in-
strument panel will indicate if
there are any faults in the system:
This lights up when the ignition is
switched on and goes out when the
engine is started.
– If it lights up continuously, consult an
approved Dealer as soon as possi-
ble;
– if it flashes, reduce the engine speed
until the light stops flashing. Contact
an authorised dealer as soon as pos-
sible.
Refer to the information on
“Reagent tank” in Section 1.
2.26
ENVIRONMENT
Emissions
Your vehicle has been designed to
emit fewer greenhouse gases (CO2)
while in use, and therefore to consume
less fuel (eg. 140 g/km, equivalent to
5.3 l/100 km for a diesel vehicle).
Our vehicles are also equipped with a
particle filter system including a cata-
lytic converter, an oxygen sensor and
an active carbon filter (the latter pre-
vents vapour from the fuel tank being
released into the open air).
For certain diesel vehicles, this system
also has a particle filter to reduce the
volume of soot particles emitted.
Please make your own
contribution towards
protecting the environment
too
Worn parts replaced in the course of
routine vehicle maintenance (vehi-
cle battery, oil filter, air filter, batter-
ies, etc.) and oil containers (empty or
filled with used oil) must be disposed
of through specialist organisations.
At the end of the vehicle’s service
life, it should be sent to approved
centres to ensure that it is recycled.
In all cases, comply with local legis-
lation.
Recycling
Your vehicle is 85% recyclable and
95% recoverable.
To achieve these objectives, many of
the vehicle components have been de-
signed to enable them to be recycled.
The materials and structures have
been carefully designed to allow these
components to be easily removed and
reprocessed by specialist companies.
In order to preserve raw material re-
sources, this vehicle incorporates nu-
merous parts made from recycled plas-
tics or renewable materials (vegetable
or animal-derived materials such as
cotton or wool).
Your vehicle has been designed with
respect for the environment in mind for
its entire service life: during production,
use and at the end of its life.
This commitment is illustrated by the
Renault eco² signature.
Manufacture
Your vehicle has been manufactured at
a factory which complies with a policy
to reduce the environmental impact
on the surrounding areas (reduction of
water and energy consumption, visual
and noise pollution, atmospheric emis-
sions and waste water; sorting and re-
using waste).
2.27
TYRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (1/3)
Resetting the standard level
for the tyre pressures
This should be done:
when the standard tyre pressure
needs to be changed to adapt to
usage conditions (empty, carrying a
load, motorway driving, etc.);
– after swapping a wheel (however
this practice is not recommended);
– after changing a wheel.
It should always be done after checking
the tyre pressure of all four tyres when
cold.
Tyre pressures must correspond to the
current usage of the vehicle (empty,
carrying a load, motorway driving, etc.).
21 3
Resetting can also be done from the
multifunction screen 3 if your vehi-
cle is fitted with a navigation system.
Select the menu “Vehicle”, “Tyre
pressure”.
If the vehicle is equipped with the func-
tion, this system monitors the tyre pres-
sure.
Operating principle
Each wheel (except for the emergency
spare wheel) has a sensor in the infla-
tion valve which periodically measures
the tyre pressure.
The system displays the current pres-
sures on the instrument panel 1 and
alerts the driver in the event of insuffi-
cient pressure.
Resetting procedure
With the ignition on:
– repeatedly and briefly press con-
trol 2 to select the tyre pressure dis-
play and the “Tyre pressure” func-
tion;
press and hold (around 3 seconds)
the button 2 to launch the reset. The
flashing tyres followed by the mes-
sages “Learning TP initiated” and
then “Tyres location in progress” in-
dicates that the reset request for the
tyre pressure reference value has
been acknowledged.
Reset can take several minutes of driv-
ing.
If the resetting is followed by short
trips, the message “Tyres location in
progress” can remain displayed after
successive restarts.
Note
The standard tyre pressure cannot be
less than that recommended and indi-
cated on the door frame.
2.28
TYRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (2/3)
Display
The display 1 and the warning light 4
on the instrument panel warn
you of any tyre pressure faults (flat tyre,
punctured tyre, system fault, etc.).
« Puncture »
A wheel B is shown in red, the warning
light 4 comes on, the message
“Puncture” appears and there is a beep.
This message appears along with the
® warning light.
They indicate that the affected wheel
is punctured or severely underinflated.
Replace it or contact an approved
dealer if it is punctured. Top up the tyre
pressure if the wheel is deflated.
“Check tyre pressure sensors”
A wheel A disappears, the warning
light 4
flashes for several sec-
onds then comes on continuously and
the message “Check tyre pressure sen-
sors” appears.
This message appears along with the
© warning light. They indicate that
at least one wheel is not fitted with sen-
sors (e.g. emergency spare wheel).
Otherwise, consult an authorised
dealer.
« Adjust tyre pressure »
A wheel B is shown in orange, the
warning light 4
comes on and
the message “Adjust tyre pressure” ap-
pears.
They indicate that a wheel is deflated.
Check and, if necessary, readjust the
pressures of the four wheels when cold.
The warning light 4
goes off after
a few minutes’ driving.
A
B
1
For your safety, the warning
light
® requires you
to stop immediately as soon
as traffic conditions allow.
The sudden loss of pressure in a tyre (burst tyre, etc.) cannot be detected by the
system.
4
2.29
Replacing wheels/tyres
This system requires specific equip-
ment (wheels, tyres, hubcaps, etc.).
Please see the information on “Tyres”
in Section 5.
Contact an approved Dealer to fit new
tyres and to find out about available ac-
cessories compatible with the system
and available from your dealer net-
work: the use of any other accessory
could affect the correct operation of the
system or damage a sensor.
Emergency spare wheel
If the vehicle is equipped with an emer-
gency spare wheel, it will not have a
sensor.
TYRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (3/3)
“Tyres location failure”
This message “Tyres location failure”
appears when driving if one or more
wheels have been fitted with sensors
not recognised by Renault.
Consult an approved dealer
Readjustment of tyre
pressures
The tyre pressures should be ad-
justed when cold (please refer to the
label located on the edge of the driver’s
door). If the tyre pressures cannot be
checked when the tyres are cold, the
recommended pressures should be in-
creased by 0.2 to 0.3 bar (3 PSI).
Never deflate a hot tyre.
Tyre repair product and
inflation kit
Because the valves are specially de-
signed, only use equipment approved
by the approved network. Please refer
to “Tyre inflation kit” in Section 5.
Changing a wheel
The system may take sev-
eral minutes depending on
use for the new wheel po-
sitions and pressures to be recog-
nised; check the tyre pressures after
all operations.
This function is an addi-
tional driving aid.
However, the function is
not intended to replace the
driver. It cannot, therefore, under
any circumstances replace the vig-
ilance or the responsibility of the
driver. Check the tyre pressures, in-
cluding the emergency spare wheel,
once a month.
2.30
DRIVING CORRECTION DEVICES AND AIDS (1/10)
ABS (anti-lock braking
system)
Under heavy braking, the ABS prevents
the wheels from locking, allowing the
stopping distance to be managed and
keeping control of the vehicle.
Under these circumstances, the vehi-
cle can be steered to avoid an obstacle
whilst braking. In addition, this system
can increase stopping distances, par-
ticularly on roads with low surface grip
(wet ground etc.).
You will feel a pulsation through the
brake pedal each time the system is
activated. The ABS does not in any way
improve the vehicle's physical perform-
ance relating to the road surface and
roadholding. It is still essential to follow
the rules of good driving practice (such
as driving at a safe distance from the
vehicle in front etc.).
Depending on the vehicle, they will con-
sist of:
– ABS (anti-lock braking system) ;
– ESC (electronic stability control)
with understeer control and trac-
tion control;
emergency brake assist;
advanced traction control;
active emergency braking;
hill start assistance.
In an emergency, apply firm and
continuous pressure to the brake
pedal. There is no need to pump
it repeatedly. The ABS will modu-
late the force applied in the braking
system.
These functions are an ad-
ditional aid in the event of
critical driving conditions,
enabling the vehicle behav-
iour to be adapted to suit the driving
conditions.
The functions do not take the place
of the driver. They do not increase
the vehicle’s limits and should
not encourage you to drive more
quickly. Therefore, they can under
no circumstances replace the vigi-
lance or responsibility of the driver
when manoeuvring the vehicle (the
driver must always be ready for
sudden incidents which may occur
when driving).
2.31
DRIVING CORRECTION DEVICES AND AIDS (2/10)
Operating faults:
© and x lit up on the in-
strument panel alongside mes-
sages “Check ABS”, “Check braking
system” and “Check ESC”: indicates
the ABS, ESC and emergency brake
assist are deactivated. Braking is
always enabled;
x, D, © and ® lit
up on the instrument panel alongside
the message “Braking system fault”:
this indicates a fault in the braking
system.
In both cases, consult an approved
dealer.
Your braking systems
are partially operational.
However, it is dangerous
to brake suddenly and
it is essential to stop immediately,
as soon as traffic conditions allow.
Contact an approved dealer.
Warning light ® re-
quires you to stop immedi-
ately, for your own safety,
as soon as traffic conditions
allow. Switch off the engine and do
not restart it. Contact an approved
Dealer.
2.32
Electronic stability control
ESC with understeer control
and traction control
Electronic stability control ESC
This system helps you to keep control
of the vehicle in critical driving condi-
tions (avoiding an obstacle, loss of grip
on a bend, etc.).
Operating principle
A sensor in the steering wheel detects
the direction selected by the driver.
Other sensors throughout the vehicle
measure the actual direction.
The system compares driver input to
the actual trajectory of the vehicle and
corrects the trajectory if necessary by
controlling the braking of certain wheels
and/or engine power. In the event that
the system is engaged, indicator light
flashes on the instrument panel.
Understeer control
This system optimises the action of the
ESC in the case of pronounced under-
steer (loss of front axle road holding).
Traction control
This system helps to limit wheelspin of
the drive wheels and to control the ve-
hicle when pulling away accelerating or
decelerating.
Operating principle
Using the wheel sensors, the system
measures and compares the speed of
the drive wheels at all times and slows
down their over-rotation. If a wheel is
starting to slip, the system brakes au-
tomatically until the drive supplied be-
comes compatible with the level of grip
under the wheel again.
The system also adjusts the engine
speed to the grip available under the
wheels, independently of the pressure
exerted on the accelerator pedal.
DRIVING CORRECTION DEVICES AND AIDS (3/10)
Operating faults
When the system detects an operat-
ing fault the message “Check ESC” and
warning light
© and appear
on the instrument panel.
In this case, the ESC and traction con-
trol system are deactivated. Consult an
authorised dealer.
2.33
DRIVING CORRECTION DEVICES AND AIDS (4/10)
The traction control system offers ad-
ditional safety. It is recommended that
you do not drive with the function di-
sabled. Correct this as soon as pos-
sible by pressing the switch 1 again.
Note: The function is reactivated auto-
matically when the ignition is switched
on or when a speed of approximately
24 mph (40 km/h) is exceeded.
Emergency brake assist
This system supplements the ABS
and helps reduce vehicle stopping dis-
tances.
Operating principle
The system detects an emergency
braking situation. In this case, the brak-
ing assistance immediately develops
maximum power and may trigger ABS
regulation. ABS braking is maintained
as long as the brake pedal is not re-
leased.
Hazard warning lights illumination
Depending on the vehicle, these may
light up in the event of sudden decel-
eration.
These functions are an ad-
ditional aid in the event of
critical driving conditions,
enabling the vehicle behav-
iour to be adapted to suit the driving
conditions.
The functions do not take the place
of the driver. They do not increase
the vehicle’s limits and should
not encourage you to drive more
quickly. Therefore, they can under
no circumstances replace the vigi-
lance or responsibility of the driver
when manoeuvring the vehicle (the
driver must always be ready for
sudden incidents which may occur
when driving).
Deactivating the function
(depending on vehicle)
In some situations (driving on very wet
ground: snow, mud, etc. or driving with
snow chains fitted), the system may
reduce the engine output to limit wheel-
spin. If this is not required, it is possible
to deactivate the function by pressing
switch 1.
The message “TRACTION CONTROL
OFF” is displayed on the instrument
panel to inform you.
1
2.34
Advanced traction control
If fitted on the vehicle, grip control
makes it easier to control the vehicle on
low grip surfaces (soft ground, etc.).
DRIVING CORRECTION DEVICES AND AIDS (5/10)
For your safety, please re-
spect the speed limit.
When they need to be re-
placed, only tyres of the
same make, size, type and profile
should be used on a single axle.
They must: either have a load ca-
pacity and speed rating at least
equal to those of the original
tyres, or conform to those recom-
mended by an authorised dealer.
Failure to heed these instructions
could endanger your safety and
affect your vehicle’s roadworthi-
ness.
Risk of loss of control of the ve-
hicle.
“Road” mode
When the vehicle is started up, the
warning light
on the selector 2
comes on, along with the instrument
panel message “Automatic mode on”.
This position enables optimal usage
under normal driving conditions (dry-
ness, humidity, light snow, etc.).
“Road” mode uses traction control func-
tions.
“Soft ground” mode
Turn the selector 2: the integrated
warning light
comes on, accom-
panied by a message on the instrument
panel “Non grip road mode on”. This
position enables optimal usage on soft
ground (mud, sand, dead leaves, etc.).
“Soft ground” mode uses traction con-
trol functions. The system automatically
switches to “Road” mode above around
25 mph (40 km/h), and the integrated
warning light
on the selector 2
comes on.
“Expert” mode
Turn the selector 2: the integrated
warning light
comes on, ac-
companied by a message on the in-
strument panel “Expert mode on”. This
position enables optimum usage in ex-
treme conditions (very snowy or muddy
roads). The engine speed is left under
the control of the driver.
The system automatically switches to
“Road” mode above around 25 mph
(40 km/h), and the integrated warning
light
on the selector 2 comes on.
2
2.35
DRIVING CORRECTION DEVICES AND AIDS (6/10)
If the driver depresses the brake pedal
and the system still detects a risk of col-
lision, the brake force is increased.
If the driver fails to react following
an alert of an imminent collision, the
system activates the brakes.
Active emergency braking
Using the sensor 3, the system calcu-
lates the distance separating the vehi-
cle from the one in front and alerts the
driver if there is a risk of a front-end col-
lision. The driver can then brake the ve-
hicle to limit the damage arising from a
collision.
Note: make sure that the radar 3 is not
obscured (by dirt, mud, snow etc. or by
the fitting of accessories such as bull
bars).
Operation
While driving (at speeds of between 20
and 85 mph (30 and 140 km/h)), if there
is a risk of collision with the vehicle in
front, the warning light 4 will be dis-
played on the instrument panel in red,
alongside a beep.
The system only detects vehicles
driving in the same direction of traf-
fic. The system cannot detect mo-
torcycles because of the difficulty in
forecasting their trajectory.
3
4
2.36
Activating or deactivating the
system
For vehicles fitted with a navigation
system
On the multifunction screen 5, select
the “Vehicle” menu, “Driving assist-
ance”, and “Active braking”, and then
choose “ON” or “OFF”.
DRIVING CORRECTION DEVICES AND AIDS (7/10)
Press the switch 7 OK again to activate
or deactivate the function:
= function activated
< function deactivated
The warning light
is displayed on
the instrument panel when the system
is deactivated. This system is reacti-
vated each time the ignition is switched
on.
Conditions for non-activation of the
system
The system does not activate:
when the gear lever is in neutral;
when the parking brake is activated;
– while cornering;
for 4-wheel drive vehicles, when
Electronic Stability Programme
(ESC) with understeer and trac-
tion control are deactivated (please
see “Electronic Stability Programme
(ESC) with understeer and traction
control” above). Warning light
comes on.
5
8
7
For vehicle not fitted with a
navigation system
With the vehicle at a standstill, press
and hold the switch 7 OK to access
the settings menu,
repeatedly press the control 8 up or
down until you reach the “Driving as-
sistance” menu. Press the switch 7
OK;
repeatedly press control 8 up or down
until you reach the “Active braking”
menu, then press the switch 7 OK.
You can access menu “Driving as-
sistance” directly from button 6
.
6
2.37
DRIVING CORRECTION DEVICES AND AIDS (8/10)
Active emergency braking
This function is an additional driving aid. However, this function is not
under any circumstances intended to replace the due care and attention
of the driver, who should at all times be in control of the vehicle.
System servicing/repairs
In the event of an impact, the sensor alignment may become changed, and its
operation will consequently be affected. Deactivate the function, then consult
an authorised dealer.
Any work in the area where the radar is located (repairs, replacements, touch-
ing up of paintwork) must be carried out by a qualified professional.
Fitting accessories which may block the radar is prohibited (bull bars etc.).
Only an authorised dealer is qualified to service the system.
In the event of system disturbance
Some conditions can disturb or damage the operation of the system, such as:
a complex environment (metal bridge, etc.);
poor weather conditions (snow, hail, black ice, etc.).
Risk of inadvertent braking.
Operating faults
When the system detects an operating
fault, the
warning light lights up
on the instrument panel, with the mes-
sage “Active braking disconnected”.
There are two possibilities:
the system is temporarily disrupted
(for example: radar obscured by
dirt, mud, snow etc.). In this case,
park the vehicle and switch off the
engine. Clean the detection zone of
the radar. When you next start the
engine, the warning light and the
message go out
– if this is not the case, this may arise
from another cause; contact an
Approved Dealer.
2.38
DRIVING CORRECTION DEVICES AND AIDS (9/10)
Active emergency braking
Limitation of the system operation
The system will only respond to vehicles which are moving or which have been sensed as moving.
A vehicle travelling in the opposite direction will not trigger any alert or any action on the system operation.
The sensor area should be kept clean and free of any modifications in order to ensure the proper operation of the system.
The system cannot respond to small vehicles such as motorbikes or bicycles as effectively as to other vehicles.
Deactivating the function
The function should be deactivated if:
the brake lights are not functioning;
the front of the vehicle has undergone an impact or been damaged;
the vehicle is being towed (breakdowns).
Halting the function
You can halt the active braking function at any time by tapping the accelerator pedal.
If the driver notices any unusual behaviour in the system, please consult an authorised dealer.
2.39
DRIVING CORRECTION DEVICES AND AIDS (10/10)
Hill start assistance
Depending on the gradient of the in-
cline, this system assists the driver
when starting on a hill. It prevents the
vehicle from rolling backwards by au-
tomatically applying the brakes when
the driver lifts his/her foot off the brake
pedal to depress the accelerator pedal.
System operation
It only operates when the gear lever is
in a position other than neutral (other
than N or P for automatic transmis-
sions) and the vehicle is completely
stationary (brake pedal depressed)
The system holds the vehicle for ap-
proximately 2 seconds. The brakes are
then released (the vehicle will move ac-
cording to the slope).
The hill start assistance
system cannot completely
prevent the vehicle from
rolling backwards in all sit-
uations (extremely steep gradients,
etc.).
In all cases, the driver may depress
the brake pedal to prevent the vehi-
cle from rolling backwards.
The hill start assistance function
should not be used for prolonged
stops: use the brake pedal.
This function is not designed to im-
mobilise the vehicle permanently.
If necessary, use the brake pedal to
stop the vehicle.
The driver must remain particularly
vigilant when driving on slippery or
low-grip surfaces.
Risk of serious injury.
2.40
Mode selector
Depending on the road conditions, turn-
ing the selector 1 enables the following
modes to be selected:
– AUTO ;
– 2WD ;
– 4WD Lock.
“AUTO" mode
To activate this mode, turn selector 1 to
the “AUTO” position.
Operating principle
“AUTO” mode automatically distributes
the engine torque between the front and
rear axles according to the road condi-
tions and the vehicle speed. This po-
sition optimises roadholding. Use this
mode on any type of road (dry, snow-
covered, slippery, etc.) or when towing
(trailer or caravan).
The warning light
on the instru-
ment panel will come on.
TRANSMISSION: 4-wheel drive (4WD) (1/4)
“2WD" mode
To activate this mode, turn the selec-
tor 1 to the “2WD” position. The warn-
ing light on the instrument panel
will come on.
Operating principle
The “2WD” mode uses the front wheels
only. Use this mode on dry roads with
good grip.
To deactivate this mode, turn the selec-
tor 1 to the “AUTO” position. Warning
light
goes out on the instrument
panel.
Remember that driving a vehicle off-
road is very different to driving it on
the road.
To make the most of your vehicle
in an off-road situation, we recom-
mend that you are trained to drive a
4x4 (4WD) vehicle.
The safety of both you and your
passengers is your responsibility,
and depends on your skill and the
care you take when driving off-road.
1
2.41
TRANSMISSION: 4-wheel drive (4WD) (2/4)
This problem may be resolved by
changing the tyres. Always use four
identical tyres (same brand, profile,
etc.) and with similar wear.
In the event of excessive wheelspin, the
mechanical components may overheat.
If this happens:
at first, the
warning light
comes on. “4WD Lock” mode is still
active – however, we recommend
that you stop as soon as possible to
allow the system to cool down (until
the warning light goes out);
if the wheels still spin, the system au-
tomatically switches to “2WD” mode
to protect the mechanical compo-
nents.
The message “4WD overheating” is
displayed on the instrument panel.
The mode cannot be changed while
the message is displayed.
Note: If the vehicle speed exceeds
approximately 24.8 mph (40 km/h) in
“4WD Lock” mode, the system auto-
matically switches back to “AUTO”
mode.
The
warning light goes out and
the
warning light comes on.
Special features of the
4-wheel drive transmission
The vehicle may make more noise when
the “AUTO" or "4WD Lock" modes are
activated. This is normal. If the system
detects a difference in the dimensions
of the front and rear wheels (eg. un-
derinflation, severe wear on an axle),
the system automatically switches to
"2WD" mode.
The message “4WD unavailable unsuit-
able tyres” is displayed on the instru-
ment panel. Drive as soon as possible
at a moderate speed to an approved
dealer.
“4WD Lock" mode
To activate this mode, turn selector 1 to
the “4WD Lock” position. The selector
the returns to the “AUTO” position. The
indicator light will light up on the
instrument panel.
Operating principle
“4WD Lock” mode distributes the
engine torque between the front and
rear axles in order to optimise the per-
formance capacity of the vehicle in off-
road situations. This mode should only
be used in extreme driving conditions
(mud, steep slopes, sand).
To deactivate this mode, turn selector 1
to the “4WD Lock” position again. The
warning light goes out on the instru-
ment panel.
2.42
TRANSMISSION: 4-wheel drive (4WD) (3/4)
Electronic stability program and
traction control when driving off-
road
When driving on soft ground (sand,
mud, deep snow), we recommend that
you deactivate the ESC function by
pressing the “ESC” switch.
In this case, only individual wheel brak-
ing remains active. This function ap-
plies the brake to any wheel that is slip-
ping, allowing the engine torque to be
transferred to the wheels with the most
grip. This is particularly useful when
crossing a bridge.
All the ESC functions will be reacti-
vated when the vehicle speed reaches
approximately 31 mph (50 km/h) (24.8
mph [40 km/h] in 4WD Lock mode),
when the engine is restarted or when
the “ESC” switch is pressed again.
Operating faults
If the system detects an operating fault,
it automatically switches to “2WD”
mode. The message “Check 4WD” is
displayed on the instrument panel, and
the
and © warning lights
come on.
Drive as soon as possible at a moder-
ate speed to an approved dealer.
For certain operating faults, the system
may not be able to switch to “2WD" or
"4WD Lock" mode. "AUTO" mode re-
mains active.
Contact an approved dealer as soon as
possible.
After stopping the engine, the system
may take up to five minutes to cool
down.
If the system detects excessive wheel-
spin on the front wheels, it adapts the
engine to run in a way that reduces
wheelspin.
Anti-lock braking in LOCK mode
When “4WD Lock" mode is active, the
ABS switches to off-road mode. In this
case, the wheels may lock intermit-
tently to achieve better grip, thus reduc-
ing braking distances on soft ground.
When this mode is active:
the vehicle’s manoeuvrability is lim-
ited during braking. This operating
mode is therefore not recommended
in very low-grip conditions (eg. ice).
there may be some noise. This is
normal, and does not indicate an op-
erating fault.
2.43
TRANSMISSION: 4-wheel drive (4WD) (4/4)
All-wheel drive system
Irrespective of the mode selected, do not start the engine if one or more wheels are not in contact with the ground
(eg. when the vehicle is on a jack or roller bench).
Do not turn the mode selector when cornering, reversing or if the wheels are spinning excessively. Only select the
“2WD”, “AUTO” or “4WD Lock” mode when the vehicle is being driven in a straight line.
Only use tyres which meet the required specifications.
“4WD Lock” mode is exclusively reserved for driving off-road. The use of this mode in any other conditions may adversely
affect the vehicle’s manoeuvrability and damage its mechanical components.
Always ensure tyres with identical specifications are fitted to all four wheels (brand, size, structure, wear etc.). Fitting tyres
of different sizes to the front and rear wheels and/or left and right wheels may have serious consequences for the tyres,
gearbox, transfer gearbox and the rear differential pinions.
2.44
LANE DEPARTURE WARNING (1/3)
This function is a driving aid in the event of the accidental crossing of
a continuous or broken line in the road. However, the function is not in-
tended to replace the driver. The function can be disrupted under certain
conditions, including:
poor visibility (rain, snow, fog, dirty windscreen, glare of the sun, partially ob-
scured road lines, etc.);
– roads with tight bends;
– closely following a vehicle in the same lane;
– worn road markings, difficult to distinguish or spaced very widely apart;
– narrow roads;
– ...
In this case, the line visibility indicators remain uncoloured on the instrument
panel to indicate that the function will not operate (lines not detected).
Under no circumstances should this function replace the driver’s care or respon-
sibility whilst performing manoeuvres.
This system notifies the driver when
they accidentally cross a continuous or
broken line.
This function uses a camera attached
to the windscreen, behind the rear-view
mirror.
2.45
LANE DEPARTURE WARNING (2/3)
The function is set to notify the
driver if:
– the vehicle speed is greater than ap-
proximately 45 mph (70 km/h);
and
lines are detected and the visibility
indicators 4 are green.
The function triggers an alert if a line
is crossed without the direction indica-
tors being activated. The function alerts
the driver through a beep and the indi-
cator the line crossed switches to red
on the instrument panel.
Activation/deactivation
Vehicles fitted with a navigation
system
From the multifunction screen 2: select
“Vehicle”, “Driving assistance”, “Lane
departure warning” then choose “ON”
or “OFF”.
Vehicles not fitted with a navigation
system
Press the switch 3.
Operation
With the function activated, the grey
visibility indicators 4 for the left and
right lines are displayed on the instru-
ment panel.
You can access menu “Driving as-
sistance” directly from button 1
.
2
3
4
1
2.46
2
6
5
Adjustment
Vehicles fitted with a navigation
system
From the multifunction screen 2, select
“Vehicle”, “Driving assistance”, “Lane
departure warning settings”.
Volume: adjust the alert volume to
one of five levels;
– sensitivity: adjust the sensitivity level
for line detection. To do this select:
“Low” line detected upon cross-
ing;
“Average” line detected on ap-
proach;
“high” line detected nearby.
Vehicles not fitted with a navigation
system
– With the vehicle at a standstill, press
and hold the switch 5 OK to access
the settings menu;
repeatedly press the control 6 up or
down until you reach the “Driving as-
sistance” menu. Press the switch 5
OK;
repeatedly press control 6 up or
down until you reach the “Lane de-
parture warning settings” menu, then
press the switch 5 OK.
Volume: adjust the alert volume to
one of three levels;
– sensitivity: adjust the sensitivity level
for line detection. To do this select:
“Low” line detected upon cross-
ing;
“Average” line detected on ap-
proach;
“high” line detected nearby.
Operating faults
In the event of a malfunction, a mes-
sage “Lane departure warning check” is
displayed on the instrument panel, and
the visibility indicators for the left and
right lines disappear from the instru-
ment panel.
Consult an approved dealer.
LANE DEPARTURE WARNING (3/3)
Conditions for non-activation
of alerts
Direction indicators activated for less
than around 2 seconds prior to de-
parting from the lane;
– very fast lane departure;
– driving continuously on a line;
– on bends, the function allows for
slightly cutting the bend;
– hazard warning lights activated;
– ...
2.47
BLIND SPOT WARNING (1/4)
This system alerts the driver to other
vehicles in the detection zone A.
The system is activated when the vehi-
cle’s speed is between approximately
30 km/h (19 mph) and 140 km/h
(87 mph).
This function uses sensors 1 installed
in the front and rear bumper of both
sides.
1
A
Special feature
Make sure that the sensors are not ob-
scured (by dirt, mud, snow, etc.).
If a sensor is obscured, the message
“Blind spotclean sensor” will appear on
the instrument panel. Clean the sen-
sors.
A
This function is an addi-
tional aid which indicates
other vehicles in the blind
spot area.
It can never in any case be a subs-
titute for care nor for the driver’s
responsibility while in charge of his
vehicle.
The driver should always look out
for sudden hazards during driving:
make sure while manoeuvring that
there are no moving or movable ob-
jects (such as a child, an animal, a
pushchair or a bicycle) or small or
narrow obstacles (such as a boulder
or a post) in the blind spot area.
2.48
Activation/deactivation
Vehicles fitted with a navigation
system
On the multifunction screen 3, select
the “Vehicle” menu, “Driving assist-
ance”, and “Driving assistance”, and
then choose “ON” or “OFF”.
You can access menu “Driving as-
sistance” directly from button 2
.
Vehicles not fitted with a navigation
system
– With the vehicle at a standstill, press
and hold the switch 4 OK to access
the settings menu;
repeatedly press the control 5 up or
down until you reach the “Driving as-
sistance” menu. Press the switch 4
OK;
BLIND SPOT WARNING (2/4)
repeatedly press control 5 up or
down until you reach the “Blind spot
alert” menu, then press the switch 4
OK.
Press the switch 4 OK again to acti-
vate or deactivate the function.
2
3
4
5
When the engine is started, the system
remembers its position when the igni-
tion was last switched off.
2.49
1
BLIND SPOT WARNING (3/4)
Operation
This function will indicate:
when the vehicle speed is between
approximately 30 km/h (19 mph) and
140 km/h (87 mph);
when another vehicle is in the blind
spot area and travelling in the same
direction as your vehicle.
If another vehicle is being overtaken,
the indicator 4 will be activated only if
that vehicle remains in the blind spot for
more than one second.
Indicator 4
An indicator light 4 is located on each
door mirror 5.
Note: Clean the door mirrors 5 regu-
larly, so that the indicator lights 4 can
be seen properly.
Display B
The function is activated and has not
detected any vehicles.
Display C
Initial warning: the indicator light 4
shows that a vehicle has been detected
in the blind spot.
Display D
When the direction indicator is activa-
ted, the indicator light 4 flashes when a
vehicle is detected in the blind spot on
the side towards which you are about to
steer. If you cancel the direction indica-
tor, the function will return to the initial
warning (display C).
5
4
B
C
D
Note: The system’s detection range
operates according to a standard
lane width. If you are driving in
narrow traffic lanes, it may detect
vehicles in other lanes.
4
2.50
Operating faults
If the system detects a fault, the mes-
sage “Check blind spot alert” is dis-
played on the instrument panel. Consult
an authorised dealer.
Note: When the engine is started, the
indicator light 4 (display B) flashes
three times. It is normal.
The system’s detection
range operates according
to a standard lane width. If
you are driving in wide traf-
fic lanes, the system might not
be able to detect a vehicle in the
blind spot.
The system might be disrupted
momentarily if it is exposed to
strong electromagnetic waves
(as beneath high-tension power
lines) or to very poor weather
conditions (heavy rain, snow,
etc.). Remain aware of driving
conditions.
There is a risk of accidents.
BLIND SPOT WARNING (4/4)
Because sensors have
been installed in the bump-
ers, any work (repairs, re-
placements, touching up of
paintwork) must be carried out by a
qualified professional.
4
B
C
D
Conditions for non-function
– If the object is not moving;
– if traffic is heavy;
– the road is winding;
if front and rear sensors both detect
objects at the same time (e.g. when
passing an articulated lorry).
– ...
2.51
CRUISE CONTROL-SPEED LIMITER: speed limiter function (1/3)
Switching on
Press switch 1 on side . The indica-
tor light
comes on, lit orange, and
the message “Speed limiter” appears
on the instrument panel, accompanied
by dashes to indicate that the speed
limiter function is activated and waiting
to store a limited speed.
To store the current speed, press the
switch 2 on side a (+): the limited speed
will replace the dashes.
The minimum stored speed is 20 mph
(30 km/h).
Controls
1 Main “On/Off” switch.
2 Controls for:
a speed limiter activation, memory
and increase (+);
b decreasing the speed limiter (-).
3 Activation and recall of memorised
limited speed (R).
4 Speed limiter function standby (with
limited speed memory) (O).
The speed limiter function helps you
stay within the driving speed limit that
you choose, known as the limit speed.
If you wish, you can associate the
speed limiter and the “Overspeed
alert” function (please refer to the in-
formation on the “Overspeed alert”
in Section 2).
1
2
a
3
4
b
2.52
CRUISE CONTROL-SPEED LIMITER: speed limiter function (2/3)
Exceeding the limit speed
It is possible to exceed the limit speed
at any time. To do this: press the accel-
erator pedal firmly and fully (beyond
the resistance point).
While the speed is being exceeded, the
speed limiter flashes red on the instru-
ment panel.
Then, release the accelerator: the
speed limiter function will return as
soon as you reach a speed lower than
the stored speed.
Limited speed cannot be maintained
If driving up or down a steep gradient,
the system is unable to maintain the
limited speed: the memorised speed
flashes red on the instrument panel and
a beep sounds at regular intervals to
inform you.
Varying the limit speed
The speed limiter can be changed by
repeatedly pressing the switch 2:
– side a (+) to increase the speed;
– side b (-) to reduce the speed.
Driving
When a limited speed has been stored
and this speed is not reached, driving is
similar to driving a vehicle without the
speed limiter function.
Once you have reached the stored
speed, no effort on the accelera-
tor pedal will allow you to exceed
the programmed speed except in an
emergency (refer to information on
“Exceeding the limit speed”).
The speed limiter function is
in no way linked to the brak-
ing system.
a
b
2
2.53
CRUISE CONTROL-SPEED LIMITER: speed limiter function (3/3)
Recalling the limit speed
If a speed has been saved, it can be re-
called by pressing switch 3 ((R)).
Putting the function on
standby
The speed limiter function is sus-
pended when you press switch 4 (O).
In this case, the speed limit remains
stored and the message “Memorised”
accompanied by this speed appears on
the instrument panel.
Switching off the function
The speed limiter function is deacti-
vated if you press switch 1: in this case
a speed is no longer stored. The orange
warning light and message on the
instrument panel goes out to confirm
that the function is deactivated.
When the speed limiter is put on
standby, pressing side a (+) on
the switch 2 reactivates the func-
tion without taking into account
the stored speed: it is the speed at
which the vehicle is moving that is
taken into account.
2
a
3
4
1
2.54
Operating principle
The system detects speed limit signs
on the side of the road and displays the
speed limit.
This mainly uses information taken
from the camera 1, attached to the
windscreen behind the rear-view mirror.
Note: Make sure the windscreen is not
obstructed (dirt, ice, snow, etc.).
With the engine running, once you have
activated the system, dashes on the in-
strument panel notify the driver that the
system is running.
When a speed limit sign is detected,
this speed will replace the dashes for
a few seconds, after which the dashes
will come on again until the next speed
limit sign is detected.
OVERSPEED ALERT (1/3)
The overspeed alert with signage panel
recognition notifies the driver that they
are exceeding the speed limit for the
section of road on which they are cur-
rently travelling.
Once the speed limiter is activated, you
can adjust the speed limiter indication
displayed by the system.
In the event of exceeding the speed
limit, the sign display is modified (the
characters change to red or the circle
around the sign flashes) no notify you.
Special situation
The system does not take into account
exceptional speed limit measures, such
as peak pollution days.
1
2.55
OVERSPEED ALERT (2/3)
Activating/deactivating the
system
Vehicles fitted with a navigation
system
On the multifunction screen 2, select
the menu “Vehicle”, “Aides à la con-
duite”, “Speed alert settings”, then
choose “ON" or "OFF".
With the function activated and de-
pending on local laws, you can activate
the “increased vigilance zones”. The
system will notify you of the distance
separating you from this zone, and
while you are travelling in the zone.
Vehicles not fitted with a navigation
system
– With the vehicle at a standstill, press
and hold the switch 5 OK to access
the settings menu;
repeatedly press the control 6 up or
down until you reach the “Aides à la
conduite” menu. Press the switch 5
OK;
repeatedly press the control 6 up or
down until you reach the Speed alert
menu, then press the switch 5 OK.
– Press OK to turn the function on or
off.
Varying the limit speed
If the speed limiter notification differs
from the detected speed value, press
and hold the switch 4:
– side a (+) to increase the notification
speed to the detected speed;
– side b (-) to reduce the notification
speed to the detected speed.
2
You can access menu “Driving as-
sistance” directly from button 3
.
4
a
b
5
6
3
2.56
This function is an additional driving aid. However, this function is not
under any circumstances intended to replace the due care and attention
of the driver, who should at all times be in control of the vehicle.
The driver should always adapt their speed to the traffic conditions, re-
gardless of the system indications.
The system enables maximum speed signs to be detected and does not detect
other traffic signage.
The driver should not, however, ignore signs which are not detected by the system
and should as a priority comply with the traffic signage and the highway code.
In the event of poor visibility (fog, snow, frost, etc.), it is possible that the system
may not indicate the correct speed to the driver.
The driver should always adapt their speed to the traffic conditions, regardless of
the system indications.
OVERSPEED ALERT (3/3)
Operating fault
The system cannot detect the speed
limit if:
– the windscreen is not clean;
– the camera is blinded by the sun;
there is insufficient visibility (night,
fog, etc.);
the signs are not legible (snow, etc.)
or are hidden (by another vehicle or
by trees).
2.57
CRUISE CONTROL-SPEED LIMITER: cruise control function (1/4)
The cruise control function helps you to
maintain your driving speed at a speed
that you choose, called the cruising
speed.
This cruising speed may be set at any
speed above 20 mph (30 km/h).
The cruise control function
is in no way linked to the
braking system.
This function is an addi-
tional driving aid. However,
the function does not take
the place of the driver.
Therefore, it can under no circum-
stances replace the driver’s respon-
sibility to respect speed limits and to
be vigilant (the driver must always
be ready to brake). Cruise control
must not be used in heavy traffic, on
undulating or slippery roads (black
ice, aquaplaning, gravel) and during
bad weather (fog, rain, side winds
etc.).
There is a risk of accidents.
Controls
1 Main “On/Off” switch.
2 Controls for:
a cruising speed activation, storage
and increase (+);
b decreasing cruising speed (-).
3 Activation with recall of saved cruis-
ing speed (R).
4 Switch the function to standby (with
cruising speed saved) (O).
2
a
b
3
4
1
2.58
CRUISE CONTROL-SPEED LIMITER: cruise control function (2/4)
Driving
Once a cruising speed is memorised
and the cruise control function is active,
you may lift your foot off the accelera-
tor pedal.
Please note that you are
strongly advised to keep
your feet close to the pedals
in order to react in an emer-
gency.
Activating cruise control
At a steady speed (above approx.
20 mph (30 km/h)), press the switch 2
on side a (+): the function is activated
and the current speed is saved.
The cruising speed replaces the dashes
and cruise control is confirmed by the
appearance of the message “Check
cruise control” and the warning light
.
If you try to activate the function below
20 mph (30 km/h), the message “Invalid
speed” will be displayed and the func-
tion will remain inactive.
Switching on
Press switch 1 on side .
Indicator light
comes on, lit green,
and the message “Check cruise con-
trol” appears on the instrument panel,
accompanied by dashes to indicate that
the cruise control function is activated
and waiting to store a cruising speed.
2
a
1
2.59
CRUISE CONTROL-SPEED LIMITER: cruise control function (3/4)
Exceeding the cruising speed
The cruising speed may be exceeded
at any time by depressing the accelera-
tor pedal. While overtaking, the cruis-
ing speed flashes red on the instrument
panel.
Then, release the accelerator: after a
few seconds, the vehicle will automati-
cally return to its set cruising speed.
Cruising speed cannot be
maintained
If driving up or down a steep gradi-
ent, the system is unable to maintain
the cruising speed: the stored speed is
flashes red on the instrument panel to
inform you of this situation.
Adjusting the cruising speed
The cruising speed can be changed by
pressing the switch 2 repeatedly:
– side a (+) to increase the speed;
– side b (-) to reduce the speed.
The cruise control function
is in no way linked to the
braking system.
2
a
b
2.60
CRUISE CONTROL-SPEED LIMITER: cruise control function (4/4)
Switching off the function
The cruise control function is deacti-
vated if you press switch 1: in this case
a speed is no longer stored. The green
warning light and message on the
instrument panel goes out to confirm
that the function is deactivated.
Returning to the cruising speed
If a speed is stored, it can be recalled,
once you are sure that the road con-
ditions are suitable (traffic, road sur-
face, weather conditions, etc.). Press
switch 3 (R) if the vehicle speed is
above 20 mph (30 km/h).
When the stored speed is recalled,
activation of the cruise control is con-
firmed by the illumination of the cruis-
ing speed in green, along with the mes-
sage “Check cruise control”.
NB: if the speed previously stored is
much higher than the current speed,
the vehicle will accelerate more rapidly
to reach this threshold.
When the cruise control function
is put on standby, pressing the
switch 2 on side a (+) reactivates
the cruise control function with-
out taking into account the stored
speed: it is the speed at which the
vehicle is moving that is taken into
account.
Putting the function on
standby
The function is set to standby if you:
use the switch 4 (O);
the brake pedal;
depress the clutch pedal or the shift
into neutral if the vehicle has an au-
tomatic gearbox.
In these three cases, the cruising
speed remains stored and the mes-
sage “Memorised” accompanied by this
speed appears on the instrument panel.
Standby is confirmed by the display of
the cruising speed in grey and the mes-
sage “Memorised”.
Putting the cruise control
on standby or switching it
off does not cause a rapid
reduction in speed: you
must brake by depressing the brake
pedal.
2
a
3
4
1
2.61
PARKING DISTANCE CONTROL (1/5)
Operating principle
Ultrasonic sensors in the rear bumper
measure the distance between the ve-
hicle and an obstacle.
This measurement is indicated by
beeps which become more frequent the
closer you come to the obstacle, until
they become a continuous beep when
the vehicle is approximately 20 to
30 centimetres from the obstacle.
The system detects obstacles to the
front, the rear and the sides of the ve-
hicle.
The parking distance control system
is only activated when the vehicle is
driven at a speed below approximately
6 mph (10 km/h).
The parking distance control system
does not take into account towing and
load carrying systems etc.
This function is an addi-
tional aid that indicates the
distance between the vehi-
cle and an obstacle whilst
reversing, using sound signals.
Under no circumstances should it
replace the driver’s care or respon-
sibility whilst reversing.
The driver should always be ready
for sudden incidents while driv-
ing: always ensure that there are
no small, narrow moving obstacles
(such as a child, animal, pushchair,
bicycle, stone, post, etc.) in the blind
spot when manoeuvring.
Special features
Ensure that the ultrasonic sensors indi-
cated by arrows 1 are not obscured (by
dirt, mud, snow, etc.).
1
2.62
Operation
Most objects located less near the
front, rear and sides of the vehicle are
detected.
Depending on the distance of the ob-
stacle, the frequency of the beep will
be higher while approaching it, and
will become a continuous beep around
20 cm away for obstacles to the sides,
and around 30 cm for obstacles to the
front or rear. Green, orange and red
zones will be displayed on the dis-
play C.
PARKING DISTANCE CONTROL (2/5)
C
A B
2
Note: the display 2 shows the vehicle
surroundings and emits beeps.
It is necessary to travel a few metres
before the side detection is activated.
If all areas have a grey background, the
whole area around the vehicle is being
monitored:
A: analysis of the vehicle surround-
ings in progress;
B: analysis of the vehicle surround-
ings carried out
2.63
An impact to the under-
side of the vehicle while
manoeuvring (e.g. strik-
ing a post, raised kerb or
other street furniture) may result in
damage to the vehicle (e.g. defor-
mation of an axle).
To avoid any risk of accident, have
your vehicle checked by an ap-
proved Dealer.
Detection of obstacles to the side
Depending on the direction of the
wheels, the system determines the tra-
jectory of the vehicle and notifies the
driver of any risk or otherwise of a col-
lision with an obstacle 3 to the side of
the vehicle.
PARKING DISTANCE CONTROL (3/5)
If a side obstacle is detected:
the beeps become faster and then
sound continuously as the obstacle
gets nearer. Green, orange and red
zones will be displayed on the dis-
play D;
if there is no risk of collision, no beep
will sound when approaching the ob-
stacle. Green, orange and red zones
will be displayed interspersed on the
display D.
Note: in the event of a change in tra-
jectory during a manoeuvre, the risk of
collision with an obstacles may be sig-
nalled late.
3
D
2.64
System sound
Enables the system sound to be se-
lected from a choice of 3.
Deactivating the system sound
Activate or deactivate the parking dis-
tance control sound.
Note: If you deactivate the sound, you
will no longer be notified with beeps
when approaching an obstacle.
Deactivating the system
Activate or deactivate parking distance
control.
Vehicles not fitted with a navigation
system
Vehicle stationary:
press and hold the switch 5 OK to
access the settings menu;
repeatedly press the control 6 up or
down until you reach the “Driving as-
sistance” menu;
press the switch 5 OK;
repeatedly press the control 6 up or
down until you reach the “Parking
distance control settings” menu;
PARKING DISTANCE CONTROL (4/5)
When the vehicle is being driven at
a speed below approximately 6 mph
(10 km/h), certain noises (motorcy-
cle, lorry, pneumatic drill, etc.) may
trigger the beeping sound of the
parking distance control.
4
Adjustment
You can adjust certain settings from the
multifunction screen 4. Please see the
equipment instructions for further infor-
mation.
Vehicles fitted with a navigation
system
Select “Vehicle”, “PARKING ASSIST”,
“Obstacle detection”.
Parking distance control audio
volume
Adjust the volume of the parking dis-
tance control by pressing + or -.
press the switch 5 OK;
using the control 6, select the set-
tings to be changed;
press the switch 5 OK.
5
6
2.65
Automatic deactivation of the
parking distance control
The system deactivates:
when the vehicle speed is above ap-
proximately 6 mph (10 km/h);
depending on the model, when the
vehicle is stationary for more than
approximately 5 seconds and an ob-
stacle is detected (such as when in a
traffic jam, etc.);
when the vehicle is in neutral for
manual gearboxes, or in position N
or P for automatic gearboxes.
PARKING DISTANCE CONTROL (5/5)
Operating faults
When the system detects an operating
fault, a beep sounds for approximately
3 seconds each time reverse gear is se-
lected and is accompanied by the mes-
sage “Check parking sensor” shown on
the instrument panel. Please consult an
authorised dealer.
2.66
REVERSING CAMERA (1/2)
4 moving guide line:
This is shown in blue on the multifunc-
tion screen 2. It indicates the vehicle
trajectory according to the position of
the steering wheel.
Special feature
Make sure that the camera is not ob-
scured (by dirt, mud, snow, condensa-
tion etc.).
Operation
Moving into reverse gear, the camera 1
located on the tailgate provides a view
of the area behind the vehicle on the
multimedia screen 2, accompanied by
one or two moving or fixed guide lines 4
and 3.
This system is initially used with the aid
of several gauges (mobile for trajectory
and fixed for distance). When the red
zone is reached, use the bumper image
to stop accurately.
Fixed gauge 3
The fixed clearance gauge comprises
coloured markers A, B and C, indicat-
ing the distance behind the vehicle:
A (red) approximately 30 centime-
tres from the vehicle;
B (yellow) approximately 70 centi-
metres from the vehicle;
C (green) approximately 150 centi-
metres from the vehicle.
This gauge remains fixed and indicates
the vehicle trajectory if the wheels are
in line with the vehicle.
1
4
C
B
A
32
3
4
2.67
This function is an additional
aid. It cannot, therefore,
under any circumstances
replace the vigilance or the
responsibility of the driver.
The driver should always be ready
for sudden incidents while driv-
ing: always ensure that there are
no small, narrow moving obstacles
(such as a child, animal, pushchair,
bicycle, stone, post, etc.) in the blind
spot when manoeuvring.
The screen shows a reverse mirror
image.
The frames are a representation
projected onto flat ground; this in-
formation must not be taken into
account when superimposed on a
vertical object or an object on the
ground.
Objects which appear on the edge
of the screen may be deformed.
In very bright light (snow, vehicle in
sunshine etc.), the camera vision
may be adversely affected.
If the boot is open or poorly closed,
the message “Boot open” appears
and the camera display disappears.
You can also adjust the camera image
settings (brightness, contrast, etc.)
Activating, deactivating the
reversing camera
From the multifunction screen 2, select
“Vehicle”, “Settings”, “Parking as-
sistance”, then “Rear view camera”.
Activate or deactivate the reversing
camera and confirm your choice.
REVERSING CAMERA (2/2)
2
2.68
ASSISTED PARKING (1/4)
This function assists with parking ma-
noeuvres.
Take your hands off the steering wheel.
You only control the pedals and the
gear lever.
You can retake control at any time by
operating the steering wheel.
Switching on
With the vehicle at a standstill or driving
at less than approximately 18.6 mph
(30 km/h), press switch 1. The warn-
ing light integrated on switch 1 lights up
and the 2 screen appears on the multi-
function screen.
2
Special features
Ensure that the ultrasonic sensors indi-
cated by arrows 3 are not obscured (by
dirt, mud, snow, etc.).
3
2
1
2.69
Choice of manoeuvre
The system can perform four types of
manoeuvres:
– parallel parking;
– perpendicular parking;
– angle parking;
moving out of a parallel parking
space.
From the multifunction screen, select
the manoeuvre to be performed.
Note: When starting the vehicle, or
after successfully completed parallel
parking using the system, the default
manoeuvre proposed by the system is
assistance in exiting a parallel parking
space. In other cases, the default ma-
noeuvre can be set from the multifunc-
tion screen.
ASSISTED PARKING (2/4)
Operation
Parking
As long as the vehicle speed is less
than 20 mph (30 km/h), the system
looks for available parking spaces on
both sides of the vehicle.
Once a space has been found, it is dis-
played on the multifunction screen, indi-
cated by a small letter “P”. Drive slowly,
with the indicators activated on the side
of the space, until the message “Stop”
is displayed, alongside a beep.
The space is then indicated on the mul-
tifunction screen by a capital “P”.
– Stop the vehicle;
– select reverse gear.
Warning light
lights up on the in-
strument panel, along with a beep.
– release the steering wheel;
follow the system instructions pro-
vided on the multifunction screen.
Your speed should not exceed around 4
mph (7 km/h).
Once the warning light
on the
instrument panel goes off and a beep
sounds, the manoeuvre has been com-
pleted.
2.70
ASSISTED PARKING (3/4)
Your speed should not exceed around
4 mph (7 km/h).
Once in position to exit the space, the
system will notify you of the end of the
manoeuvre.
Once the warning light
on the
instrument panel goes off and a beep
sounds, the manoeuvre has been com-
pleted.
Suspending the manoeuvre
The manoeuvre is suspended in the fol-
lowing circumstances:
– you take control of the wheel;
– a door or the boot is opened;
the vehicle is at a standstill for too
long;
an obstacle in the direction of move-
ment prevents the manoeuvre from
being completed;
– the engine will stop.
Once the warning light
on the
instrument panel goes off and a beep
sounds, the manoeuvre has been sus-
pended. Then to resume the manoeu-
vre, press and hold the system activa-
tion switch.
In this case, the reason for suspending
the manoeuvre will be displayed on the
multifunction screen.
Make sure:
you have released the steering wheel
and;
that all doors and the boot are closed,
and;
that no obstacles are in the way of
the direction of movement, and;
– that the engine is started.
Cancelling the manoeuvre
The manoeuvre can be stopped in the
following cases:
– by pressing the system activation
switch;
the vehicle speed has exceeded
4 mph (7 km/h);
You have performed more than ten
forwards/backwards movements in
one manoeuvre;
the parking distance control sensors
are dirty or blocked;
– the vehicle wheels have skidded.
Once the warning light
on the
instrument panel goes off and a beep
sounds, the manoeuvre has been
ended.
Exiting a parallel parking space
Select “exit parallel parking space”
mode;
activate the direction indicator on the
side you wish to go out of;
press and hold switch 1 (around
2 seconds).
Warning light
lights up on the in-
strument panel, along with a beep.
– release the steering wheel;
go forwards and backwards using
the parking distance control system
alerts.
1
2.71
ASSISTED PARKING (4/4)
This function is an additional driving aid. However, this function is not under any circumstances intended to replace the
due care and attention of the driver, who should at all times be in control of the vehicle.
Make sure that the manoeuvre complies with the applicable traffic regulations at your location.
The driver should always look out for sudden hazards during driving: always ensure that there are no moving obstacles
(such as a child, animal, pram, bicycle, etc.) or small, narrow objects such as stones or posts in your path when manoeu-
vring.
– The system cannot detect objects located in the sensor blind spots.
When manoeuvring, the steering wheel may turn quickly: do not put your hands inside, and make sure that nothing is caught
inside.
– Always visually check that the parking space proposed by the system is still available and contains no obstacles.
– The system should be deactivated when towing a trailer.
2.72
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION (1/3)
Operation
With the selection lever 1 in position P,
switch on the ignition.
To move out of position P, you must de-
press the brake pedal before pressing
the unlocking button 2.
With your foot on the brake pedal
(warning light
Ó on the display 3
goes out), move the lever out of posi-
tion P.
Only engage D or R when the vehi-
cle is stopped, with your foot on the
brake and the accelerator pedal re-
leased.
Selector lever 1
P: park
R: reverse
N: Neutral
D: automatic mode
M: manual mode
Note: Press the button 2 to go from po-
sition D or N to R or P.
3: displays the gear engaged in manual
mode.
1
2
Driving in automatic mode
Move lever 1 to position D.
In most road conditions you will en-
counter, you will not need to touch your
lever again: the gears will change au-
tomatically at the right time and at the
most suitable engine speed because
the automatic system takes into ac-
count the vehicle load and road contour
and adjusts itself to the particular driv-
ing style you have chosen.
Economical driving
When driving, always leave the lever
in position D, keeping the accelerator
pedal lightly depressed to ensure auto-
matic gear changes at a lower engine
speed.
Accelerating and overtaking
Depress the accelerator pedal firmly
and fully (so that it goes beyond the
kickdown point).
This will enable you to change down
to the optimum gear within the
engine range.
3
2.73
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION (2/3)
Special cases
In certain driving conditions (for exam-
ple, engine protection, operation of the
Electronic Stability Programme: the au-
tomatic system may change gear auto-
matically.
Likewise, to prevent incorrect manoeu-
vres, a gear change may be refused by
the automatic system: in this case the
gear display flashes for a few seconds
as a warning.
Special circumstances
If the bends and road surface do
not allow you to stay in automatic
mode (e.g. in the mountains), we
recommend that you change to
manual mode. This will prevent the
automatic gearbox from changing
gear repeatedly when climbing, and
permit engine braking on long de-
scents.
In cold weather, start the engine
and wait a few seconds before
moving the selector lever from posi-
tion P or N and engaging it in D or R
to prevent the engine stalling.
Driving in manual mode
With the selection lever 1 in position D,
move the lever to the left.
Shifting the lever repeatedly allows you
to change gears manually:
to move down through the gears,
push the lever forwards;
– to move up through the gears, push
the lever backwards.
The gear selected is displayed on the
instrument panel.
1
When facing uphill, to remain
stopped, do not keep your foot on
the accelerator.
Risk of overheating the automatic
gearbox.
2.74
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION (3/3)
Parking the vehicle
When the vehicle is stopped, move the
lever to position P while keeping your
foot on the brake pedal: the gearbox is
in neutral and the drive wheels are me-
chanically locked by the driveshaft.
Apply the handbrake or, depending
on the vehicle, ensure that the elec-
tronic parking brake is applied.
When setting off, if the lever is locked
in position P even though you are
pressing the brake pedal, the lever can
be released manually. To do this, insert
a tool (with a hard rod) into the slot 4 to
unlock the lever.
Contact an authorised dealer as soon
as possible.
Maintenance period
Refer to the maintenance document
for your vehicle or consult an Approved
Dealer to check whether the automatic
gearbox requires scheduled mainte-
nance.
If it does not need to be serviced, there
is no need to top up the oil.
Operating faults
when driving, if the message
“Check auto gearbox” appears on
the instrument panel, it indicates a
failure.
Contact your approved Dealer as
soon as possible;
when driving, if the message
“Gearbox overheating” appears on
the instrument panel, stop as soon
as possible to let the gearbox cool
down and wait for the message to
disappear;
If a vehicle with an automatic
gearbox breaks down, refer to the
information on “Towing” in Section 5.
4
For safety reasons, do not
switch off the ignition before
the vehicle has come to a
complete standstill.
An impact to the under-
side of the vehicle while
manoeuvring (e.g.: strik-
ing a post, raised kerb or
other street furniture) may result in
damage to the vehicle (e.g.: defor-
mation of an axle).
To avoid any risk of accident, have
your vehicle checked by an ap-
proved Dealer.
3.1
Section 3: Your comfort
Air vents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2
Manual air conditioning/heating system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4
Automatic climate control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.7
Air conditioning: information and advice on use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.13
Outside air quality and deodorisation functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.15
Electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.16
Fixed glass roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.17
Interior lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.18
Passenger compartment storage/fittings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.20
Ashtray/cigarette lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.25
Sliding rear bench seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.27
Luggage compartment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.29
Luggage cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.30
Luggage compartment storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.31
Transporting objects in the luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.33
Transporting objects: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.34
equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.34
Luggage net. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.35
Roof bars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.37
Spoiler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.38
Multimedia equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.39
3.2
AIR VENTS, air outlets (1/2)
1 left-hand air vent
2 windscreen demisting vents
3 centre air vents
4 side window demister outlets
5 right-hand air vent
6 multifunction screen
7 footwell heater outlets for front pas-
sengers
8 footwell heater outlets for rear pas-
sengers (depending on the vehicle)
2
1
5
7
7
8
4
3
6
2
4
8
3.3
Side air vents
Air flow
Move the control knob 11 (beyond the
resistance point).
Upwards: closed.
Down: maximum air flow.
Direction
Move the cursors 12 to the desired po-
sition.
Centre air vents.
Air flow
Move the control knob 10 (beyond the
resistance point).
Upwards: closed.
Down: maximum air flow.
Direction
Move the cursors 9 to the desired po-
sition.
AIR VENTS, air outlets (2/2)
11
12
Do not add anything to the
vehicle’s ventilation circuit
(for example, to remove
bad odours).
There is a risk of damage or of
fire.
10
9
3.4
The controls
1 Adjusting the air temperature.
2 Air recirculation.
3 “Clear View” function.
4 Adjusting the ventilation speed.
5 Stopping the system.
6 De-icing/demisting of the rear screen
and, depending on the vehicle, the
door mirrors.
7 Air conditioning.
8 Adjusting air distribution in the pas-
senger compartment.
MANUAL AIR CONDITIONING (1/3)
A B
Switching air conditioning on
or off
The air conditioning is switched on (in-
dicator light on) or off (indicator light off)
using the button 7.
The air conditioning system is used
for:
lowering the temperature inside the
passenger compartment;
eliminating condensation more
quickly.
Clear View function
Press button 3 – the integrated indica-
tor light comes on.
This function quickly demists and de-
ices the windscreen, the rear screen,
the front side windows, and the door
mirrors (depending on the vehicle). The
air conditioning and rear screen de-ic-
ing functions must be activated.
Press button 6 to stop the heated rear
screen operating, and the integrated in-
dicator goes out.
To exit this function, press button 3
again.
C
1
3 4
5
6
7 8
2
Indicators
A Air temperature.
B Air recirculation.
C Fan speed.
D Distribution of air in the passenger
compartment.
D
3.5
Air recirculation is for:
isolating the vehicle from the exter-
nal atmosphere (driving in polluted
areas, etc.);
lowering the passenger compart-
ment temperature as quickly as pos-
sible.
Switching the air
recirculation on
Press the button 2: the warning light B
comes on. In these conditions, air is
taken from the passenger compartment
and is recycled, with no air being taken
from outside the vehicle.
MANUAL AIR CONDITIONING (2/3)
Prolonged use of air recirculation can lead to condensation forming on the side
windows and windscreen, and discomfort due to the use of non-renewed air in
the passenger compartment. We therefore advise you to return to normal mode
(external air) as soon as the air recirculation function is no longer required, by
pressing the button 6 again.
Distribution of air in the
passenger compartment
There are five air distribution options.
Turn control 8 to choose the distribution
option.
The air distribution is displayed on the
indicator D.
õ
The air flow is directed to the
windscreen and the front side
window demisting vents.
÷
The air flow is distributed be-
tween all the air vents, the
front side window demisting vents, the
windscreen demisting vents and the
footwells.
ó
The air flow is directed mainly
towards the footwells.
G
The air flow is directed towards
the dashboard air vents, the
front footwells and, depending on the
vehicle, the second row footwells.
J
All the air flow is directed to the
dashboard vents.
B
6
8
2
D
3.6
Varying the ventilation speed
You can adjust the fan speed by press-
ing the buttons 4 to increase or reduce
the fan speed.
The fan speed is displayed on the in-
dicator C.
The system is stopped (OFF): the venti-
lation speed is zero (vehicle stationary).
You can, however, still feel a slight flow
of air when the vehicle is moving.
MANUAL AIR CONDITIONING (3/3)
Adjusting the air temperature
Turn the control 1 to obtain the de-
sired temperature. The more bars dis-
played A, the higher the temperature.
When the air conditioning system is
used for long periods, it may begin to
feel cold. To increase the temperature,
turn control 1 to the right.
The air temperature is displayed on the
indicator A.
The de-icing function cannot be
used with the air recirculation mode
to avoid any risk of condensation
forming on the windscreen and trig-
gers the air conditioning to come on.
The integrated light in button 7 does
not come on.
Rear screen de-icing/
demisting
With the engine running, press
button 6. The operating tell-tale comes
on.
This function permits rapid demisting/
de-icing of the rear screen and de-icing
of the door mirrors (on equipped vehi-
cles).
To exit this function, press button 6
again.
Demisting automatically stops.
Stopping the system
To stop the system, press the button 5
OFF (the integrated warning light
comes on).
A C
1
4
5
6
7
3.7
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL (1/6)
Automatic mode
The automatic climate control system
guarantees comfort in the passen-
ger compartment and good visibility
(except in the event of extreme condi-
tions), while optimising consumption.
The system controls the ventilation
speed, air distribution, air recirculation,
and starting and stopping the air condi-
tioning and air temperature.
AUTO: allows the selected com-
fort level to be best attained, depend-
ing on the exterior conditions. Press
button 7. The integrated indicator light
on button 7 comes on.
Varying the ventilation speed
In automatic mode, the system uses
the most suitable amount of air to reach
and maintain the desired comfort level.
You can still adjust the fan speed by
pressing the buttons 6 to increase or
reduce the fan speed.
In this case, the integrated indicator
light on button 7 goes out and the ven-
tilation speed selected is displayed on
the indicator C.
Indicators
A Left-hand side air temperature.
B Distribution of air.
C Fan speed.
D Automatic air recirculation warning
light.
E Right-hand side air temperature.
The controls
1 Stopping the system or, depending
on the vehicle, de-icing/demisting
the windscreen.
2 and 10 air temperature.
3 “Clear View” function.
4 and 5 Passenger compartment air
distribution.
6 Fan speed and, depending on the
ventilation, stopping the system.
7 Automatic programme.
8 Air conditioning.
9 Air recirculation.
11 De-icing/demisting of the rear screen
and, depending on the vehicle, the
door mirrors.
12 DUAL function
1
2
4
5
6
7
8
9 10
12
A B
C
D
E
3
11
3.8
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL (2/6)
Temperature adjustment
There are two types of settings:
uniform passenger compartment
setting;
adjustment in DUAL function to inde-
pendently adjust the left and/or right-
hand side of the passenger compart-
ment.
Uniform passenger compartment
setting
Use control 2.
The displayed temperature values
show a comfort level.
When starting the engine, increas-
ing or decreasing the value dis-
played will not allow the com-
fort level to be reached any more
quickly. The system will always op-
timise the temperature increase or
decrease (the ventilation system
does not start instantly at maximum
speed: it gradually increases). This
may take several minutes.
Generally speaking, unless there is
a particular reason not to, the dash-
board air vents should remain open.
DUAL function setting
Press button 12 to activate.
Use the control 2 to adjust the left side
and control 10 for the right side.
2
10
12
3.9
Preferably, use automatic mode.
In automatic mode (warning light 7
is on), all climate control functions
are controlled by the system.
You can always modify the choice
of system; in this case, the warning
light in the button 7 goes out.
To return to automatic mode, press
programme AUTO.
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL (3/6)
Switching air conditioning on
or off
In automatic mode, the system switches
the air conditioning system on or off,
depending on the climate conditions.
Press the switch 8 to force activation
(the integrated warning light comes on)
or stop the air conditioning (the inte-
grated warning light goes out).
7
8
6
3
11
Vehicles fitted with the ECO
mode (button 13): Once activated,
the ECO mode may reduce the ef-
fective performance of the air con-
ditioning. Please refer to the infor-
mation on “Eco-driving” in Section 2.
13
3.10
4
5
B
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL (4/6)
6
3
11
Clear View function
This function quickly demists and de-
ices the windscreen, the rear screen,
the front side windows, and the door
mirrors (depending on the vehicle). The
air conditioning and rear screen de-ic-
ing functions must be activated.
Press button 3 – the integrated indica-
tor light comes on.
To stop the operation of the rear screen,
press the de-icer button 11. The inte-
grated warning light will go out.
You can change the fan speed: press
the button 6.
To exit this function, press button 3
again.
Some buttons have an operating
tell-tale which indicates the operat-
ing status.
Adjusting the distribution
of air in the passenger
compartment
There are five air distribution options.
Press switches 4 and 5 to scroll through
them. The arrows located on the indica-
tor B combine to show you the distribu-
tion selected:
õ
All the air is then directed to
the windscreen and front side
window demisting vents.
÷
The air flow is distributed be-
tween front side window de-
misting vents, the windscreen demist-
ing vents and the footwells.
ó
The air flow is directed mainly
towards the footwells.
G
The air flow is directed to the
dashboard vents and the foot-
wells.
J
All the air flow is directed to the
dashboard vents.
3.11
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL (5/6)
Rear screen de-icing/
demisting
Press button 11 – the integrated indi-
cator light comes on. This function en-
ables rapid demisting or de-icing of the
rear screen and de-icing of the door
mirrors (on equipped vehicles).
To exit this function, press button 11
again. Demisting automatically stops.
De-icing or demisting the
windscreen
(depending on the vehicle)
With the engine running, press the
button 1 – the integrated indicator will
come on.
This function enables quick electric de-
icing/demisting.
111
3.12
Manual use
Pressing the button 9 allows air recir-
culation to be forced. In this case, the
integrated warning light comes on and
the indicator D goes out.
Prolonged use of this position may lead
to odours, caused by non-renewal of
air, and the formation of condensation
on the windows.
We therefore advise you to return to au-
tomatic mode as soon as air recircula-
tion is no longer needed, by pressing
button 9.
Stopping the system
To stop the system, press the button 1
OFF (the integrated warning light
comes on) or, depending on the ve-
hicle, reduce the fan speed down to
a minimum by pressing the button 6
marked by OFF as many times as is
necessary.
To start, press the switch 7.
Recycling
This function is managed automati-
cally (operation is confirmed by warn-
ing light D), but you can also activate
it manually.
Note:
during recirculation, air is taken from
the passenger compartment and
is recycled, with no air being taken
from outside the vehicle;
air recirculation allows the external
atmosphere to be cut off (when driv-
ing in polluted areas, etc.);
lowering the passenger compart-
ment temperature as quickly as pos-
sible.
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL (6/6)
The demisting/de-icing will still take
priority over the air recirculation.
1
7
9
D
6
3.13
AIR CONDITIONING: information and operating instructions (1/2)
Do not add anything to the
vehicle’s ventilation circuit
(for example, to remove
bad odours).
There is a risk of damage or of
fire.
Do not open the refriger-
ant fluid circuit. The fluid
may damage eyes or skin.
Fuel consumption
You will normally notice an increase in
fuel consumption (especially in town)
when the air conditioning is operating.
For vehicles fitted with air conditioning
with no automatic mode, switch off the
system when it is not required.
Advice for reducing consumption
and helping to preserve the environ-
ment
Drive with the air vents open and the
windows closed.
If the vehicle has been parked in the
sun, open the doors for a few moments
to let the hot air escape before starting
the engine.
Maintenance
Refer to the Maintenance Document
for your vehicle for the inspection fre-
quency.
Operating faults
As a general rule, contact your ap-
proved dealer in the event of an oper-
ating fault.
Reduction in de-icing, demisting
or air conditioning performance.
This may be caused by the passen-
ger compartment filter cartridge be-
coming clogged.
No cold air is being produced.
Check that the controls are set cor-
rectly and that the fuses are sound.
Otherwise, switch off the system.
Presence of water under the
vehicle
After prolonged use of the air condi-
tioning system, it is normal for water
to be present under the vehicle. This is
caused by condensation.
Advice on use
In some situations (air conditioning off,
air recirculation activated, ventilation
speed at zero or low etc.), you may
notice that condensation starts to form
on the windows and windscreen.
If there is condensation, use the “Clear
View” function to remove it, then use
the air conditioning in automatic mode
to stop it forming again.
Vehicles equipped with ECO
mode: once activated, ECO mode
may reduce the performance of the
air conditioning. Please refer to the
information on “Driving advice, Eco-
driving” in Section 2.
Use the air conditioning system reg-
ularly, even in cold weather, running
it at least once a month for approxi-
mately 5 minutes.
3.14
The refrigerant circuit may contain
fluorinated greenhouse gases.
Depending on the vehicle, you will find
the following information on label A af-
fixed inside the engine compartment.
The presence and location of the infor-
mation on label A depends on the ve-
hicle.
A
A
A
Do not open the refriger-
ant circuit. The fluid may
damage eyes or skin.
Before performing any
action in the engine com-
partment, the ignition must
be switched off (please see
the information on “Starting, stop-
ping the engine” in Section 2).
AIR CONDITIONING: information and operating instructions (2/2)
Ñ
Type of refrigerant fluid
Type of oil in the air condi-
tioning circuit
Inflammable product
Consult the drivers hand-
book
Maintenance
Quantity of refrigerant
fluid present in the ve-
hicle.
x.xxx kg
Global Warming
Potential (CO2 equi-
valent).
GWP xxxxx
Quantity in weight and
in CO2 equivalent.
CO2 eq
x.xx t
3.15
OUTSIDE AIR QUALITY AND DEODORISATION FUNCTION
With the air conditioning switched
on, from the screen A, select Menu,
Vehicle, Take care.
Outside air quality
The air quality is given using a graph on
the multifunction screen.
Three colours indicate the air quality
level (from the cleanest to the most
polluted):
1 (blue)
2 (light grey)
3 (grey)
A
Deodorisation function
This reduces unpleasant odours in the
passenger compartment.
Deodorization cycle
ON: helps to reduce the unpleasant
odour more quickly in the passenger
compartment,
OFF: stop the function.
Note:
The function is on a timer. It stops auto-
matically after a few minutes.
Take care
On
Deodorization cycle
Please refer to the multimedia in-
structions for further information.
3.16
ELECTRIC WINDOWS (1/2)
These systems operate:
with the engine running;
with the ignition off until one of the
front doors is opened (limited to ap-
proximately 12 minutes).
with the engine off, front doors
closed, after pressing the start
button.
Press or pull the switch to raise or lower
a window to the desired height (the rear
windows do not open fully);
1
3
4
5
6
Avoid resting any objects against a
half-open window: there is a risk that
the electric window winder could be
damaged.
Passenger safety
The driver can prevent all
occupants from operating
the front and rear passen-
ger electric windows by pressing
switch 2.
Drivers responsibility
Never leave your vehicle with the
RENAULT card or key inside, and
never leave a child, adult who is not
self-sufficient or a pet, even for a
short while. They may pose a risk to
themselves or to others by starting
the engine or activating equipment
(such as the gear lever or electric
windows). If any part of the body be-
comes trapped, reverse the direc-
tion of the window immediately by
pressing the relevant switch.
Risk of serious injury.
2
From the driver’s seat, use switch:
1 for the driver’s side;
3 for the front passenger side;
4 and 5 for the rear passengers.
From the passenger seats, use
switch 6.
3.17
One-touch mode
Depending on the vehicle, this mode
works in addition to the operation of the
electric windows described previously.
It is only fitted to the driver’s window.
Briefly press or pull switch 1 fully: the
window is fully lowered or raised.
Pressing the switch again stops the
window moving.
Note: if the window detects resistance
when closing (e.g.: branch of a tree,
etc.) it stops and then lowers again by a
few centimetres.
ELECTRIC WINDOWS (2/2)/FIXED SUNROOF
Operating faults
In case of a fault when closing a window,
the system reverts to normal mode:
pull the switch concerned up as often
as necessary to fully close the window
(the window will close gradually), hold
the switch (still on the closure side) for
one second then lower and raise the
window fully to reinitialise the system.
If necessary, contact your authorised
dealer.
Fixed glass roof
Opening the blind
Pull the switch 7 and put it to the de-
sired position.
Closing the blind
Push the switch 7 and put it to the de-
sired position.
Automatic operation
Quickly pull or push the switch 7 as far
as it will go: the blind closes or opens
fully. Using the switch stops the blind
function in place.
7
When closing the windows,
ensure that no part of the
body (arm, hand, etc.) is
protruding from the vehicle.
Risk of serious injury.
3.18
Note: for vehicles fitted with a naviga-
tion system, you can use the multifunc-
tion screen to deactivate/activate the
courtesy lights which come on when
the doors or boot are opened. To do
this, please refer to “Vehicle settings
customisation menu” in Section 1.
Map reading lights
Press switch 1 to get:
– permanent lighting;
immediate switching off.
When the doors or boot are un-
locked and opened, the reading and
footwell lights come on temporarily.
INTERIOR LIGHTING (1/2)
With the doors properly shut, lock-
ing or starting the engine makes the
interior lights and the courtesy lights
go out.
1
1
3.19
Glove box light
Light 2 comes on when the cover is
opened.
2
3
Boot lights
Light 3 comes on when the luggage
compartment is opened.
INTERIOR LIGHTING (2/2)
3.20
Front sun visor
Lower sun visor 2.
Sun visor storage 3
This can be used for storing motorway
tickets, cards, etc.
Courtesy mirrors
Lift the cover 4.
Nothing should be placed
on the floor area in front of
the driver as such objects
may slide under the pedal
during braking manoeuvres, thus
obstructing its use.
Front door storage pockets 1
They can hold a 0.5-litre bottle.
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT STORAGE, FITTINGS (1/5)
1
Ensure that no hard, heavy
or pointed objects are
placed in the “open” storage
compartments in such a
way that they may fall onto passen-
gers during sudden turning, braking
or in the event of an accident.
Centre console storage
compartment 5
5
When driving, ensure the
courtesy mirror cover is
closed. Risk of injury.
34
2
3.21
Cup holders 6
This can be used for storing a mobile
ashtray, cup holder, etc.
This storage compartment has a re-
movable carpet for easy cleaning.
When turning corners,
accelerating or braking,
ensure that the recepta-
cle being held by the cup
holder is not dislodged.
There is a risk of injury if hot liquid
escapes.
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT STORAGE, FITTINGS (2/5)
6
Storage compartment under
the front central armrest A
(depending on the vehicle)
Lift the control 8 and raise the arm-
rest 7.
Front centre armrest storage
compartment B
Lift the control 9 and raise the arm-
rest 7.
A
9
8
7
B
7
7
3.22
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT STORAGE, FITTINGS (3/5)
Glovebox
To open the glovebox, lift the catch 10.
10
11
Grab handle 11
This offers support and can be held
when the vehicle is being driven.
Do not use it for getting into or out of
the vehicle.
12
11
Clothes hooks 12
3.23
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT STORAGE, FITTINGS (4/5)
Rear centre console storage
compartments 15
14
Front seat storage pockets 14
15
Storage 13
13
3.24
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT STORAGE, FITTINGS (5/5)
17
Ensure that no hard, heavy
or pointed objects are
placed in the “open” storage
compartments in such a
way that they may fall onto passen-
gers during sudden turning, braking
or in the event of an accident.
Rear armrest with cup holder
Pull down the armrest 16.
16
Rear door storage
compartment 17
When turning corners,
accelerating or braking,
ensure that the recepta-
cle being held by the cup
holder is not dislodged.
There is a risk of injury if hot liquid
escapes.
3.25
Ashtray 1
To open, lift the cover. To empty, pull the
ashtray towards you and it will be re-
leased from its housing.
Accessories sockets 2
They are provided for connecting ac-
cessories approved by our Technical
Department.
ASHTRAY, CIGARETTE LIGHTER, ACCESSORIES SOCKET
If your vehicle is not fitted with a
cigar lighter and an ashtray, these
can be obtained from an approved
Dealer.
2
1
2
Connect accessories with
a maximum power of
120 watts (12 V) only.
When several accessory
sockets are used at the same time,
the total power of the connected
accessories must not exceed
180 watts.
Fire hazard.
3.26
The headrest is a safety
component; check that it is
fitted and in the correct po-
sition. The top of the head-
rest should be as close as possible
to the top of the head.
Centre seat headrest storage
position
Press the button A and lower the cen-
tral headrest 1 completely.
When the headrest is set at the
lowest position, this is for storage
only. It should not be in this position
when a seat is occupied.
To remove a headrest
Raise the headrest as far as it will go,
then press button A and remove the
headrest.
The headrests 2 on the rear side seats
cannot be adjusted.
Position for using the central
headrest
Raise the central headrest 1 as far
as possible to use it in the high posi-
tion. Check that the bonnet is correctly
locked.
REAR HEAD RESTS
A
To refit a headrest
Insert the rods in the holes, press the
button A and lower the headrest. Check
that it is correctly locked in place.
1
2
3.27
To manually fold down the
seatbacks
Ensure that the front seats are far
enough forward.
Lower the headrests fully.
Depending on the vehicle, put the seat
belt in the belt guide 2 to avoid damag-
ing it before folding down the seatback.
Pull the control 1 and lower the seat-
back A.
To replace the seatback, proceed in
the reverse order to removal.
Refit the seatback and click it back into
place.
REAR BENCH SEAT (1/2)
For safety reasons, carry
out any adjustments when
the vehicle is not being
driven.
When moving the rear
seats, ensure that nothing
obstructs the anchorage
points (passenger’s arm or
leg, a pet, gravel, cloth, toys, etc.).
A
1
The configuration of the
two-seat bench with the
small seatback B pulled
down, does not allow the
central seat to be used as it would
be impossible to buckle the seat belt
(belt buckles inaccessible).
When refitting the seat-
back, make sure it is cor-
rectly locked in place.
If seat covers are fitted,
make sure these do not prevent the
seatback latch from locking in.
Make sure that the seat belts are
positioned correctly.
Reposition the headrests.
B
2
3.28
To automatically fold down
the seatbacks (flat position)
From the boot, pulling the control 3 en-
ables you to automatically unlock the
rear bench seatbacks to get a flat floor.
Conditions of use
– Vehicle stationary;
boot lid open;
rear seat belts unlocked.
Operating fault
If all user conditions have been ful-
filled and the folding action still fails to
operate, please contact an authorised
dealer.
REAR BENCH SEAT (2/2)
3
When moving the rear
seats, ensure that nothing
obstructs the anchorage
points (passenger’s arm or
leg, a pet, gravel, cloth, toys, etc.).
Use restriction
It is forbidden to drive with a seatback
or a front seat folded down when there
is a passenger occupying a rear seat.
For safety reasons, carry
out any adjustments when
the vehicle is not being
driven.
3.29
Opening the doors manually
from the inside
If it is impossible to unlock the tailgate,
it can be done manually from inside:
access the luggage compartment by
tilting the rear bench seatback(s),
insert a pencil or similar object in
recess 3 and slide the unit as shown
in the illustration;
push the tailgate to open it.
BOOT
To open
Press button 1 and lift the tailgate.
To close
Lower the tailgate using the handles 2
inside the tailgate to help you.
1
3
2
3.30
Refitting the luggage
compartment cover
Position the side 3 of the luggage com-
partment cover in its housing, press the
side 3 and position the opposite side
into its housing.
Luggage compartment cover
storage
Version without emergency spare
wheel
Lift the false floor 4, then position the
luggage cover roller 2. Attach it using
the elastic cords 5 on each side of the
boot.
To remove the flexible
section of the luggage cover
Pull then lift the handle 1 gently.
Guide the luggage cover onto the
roller 2.
Removing the luggage cover
Press the side 3 of the luggage cover 2
(movement A), release the opposite
side from its housing then lift, remove
the whole cover.
LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT COVER
3
4
5
2
Do not place any heavy or
solid objects on the luggage
cover. These may pose a
risk to the vehicle occu-
pants if the driver has to brake sud-
denly or if the vehicle is involved in
an accident.
1
2
5
4
A
3.31
Storage position
This allows for more space to store
things in the boot.
– Remove part B then part A of the
mobile floor1;
– place part A in the luggage com-
partment under the supports 3 then
part B.
BOOT FITTINGS (1/2)
A
Mobile floor 1
(depending on the vehicle)
It is made up of two independent and
interchangeable parts, A and B. The
smooth side is easy to clean.
Flat position
It allows you to have a flat floor by fold-
ing down the back of the rear bench
seat.
The mobile floor is positioned on sup-
ports 3.
Maximum load allowed on the
mobile floor when flat: 50 kg evenly
distributed.
Intermediate position
This enables you to compartmentalise
the boot into two separate spaces.
Remove the part B of the mobile
floor;
place it in the boot using the runners
provided 2.
1
1
B
1 2
3
3.32
BOOT FITTINGS (2/2)
Bag hooks 4
Maximum weight per hook: 5 kg.
Anchorage points
Attachment points 5
If your vehicle is not equipped with
anchorage points, you can get them
from an authorised dealer.
4
5
3.33
Always position the heavi-
est items directly on the
floor. Use the lashing
points 1 on the boot floor, if
these are fitted to the vehicle. The
luggage should be loaded in such a
way that no items will be thrown for-
ward and strike the occupants if the
driver has to brake suddenly. Fasten
the rear seat belts, even if the seats
are not occupied.
TRANSPORTING OBJECTS IN THE LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT
Always position the objects transported
so that the largest surface is against:
The rear bench seatback for normal
loads (example A).
The front seatbacks with the rear
seatbacks folded down, the mobile
floor in the flat-floor position (exam-
ple B).
The front seatbacks with the rear
seatbacks folded down, the mobile
floor in the stored-away position, as is
the case for maximum loads (exam-
ple C).
If you have to place objects on the folded
seatback, it is necessary that you lower
the headrests before folding the seat-
back so that it can be folded as flat as
possible against the seat.
B
A
1
C
3.34
Permissible nose weight, maxi-
mum permissible towing weight,
braked and unbraked: refer to
the information on “Weights” in
Section 6.
Choice and fitting of towing
equipment
Maximum weight of towing equip-
ment: 32 kg
For fitting and conditions of use,
refer to the equipment’s fitting in-
structions.
Please keep these instructions with
the rest of the vehicle documenta-
tion.
TRANSPORTING OBJECTS towbar
A
Maximum dimension A: 1029 mm.
If the towbar ball obscures the regis-
tration plate or the rear fog lights, it
should be removed when not in use.
In all cases, comply with local leg-
islation.
3.35
LUGGAGE NET (1/2)
attach the two hooks 5 of the net
straps 3 on the anchoring points 4
located under the carpet;
adjust the net strap 3 so that it is taut.
Fitting the luggage net
behind the front seats
Inside the vehicle on each side:
– lower cover 1 to gain access to the
anchoring points for the top part of
the luggage net;
insert the top rod of net 2 into the an-
choring points;
Depending on the vehicle, this may be
used when transporting animals or lug-
gage to isolate them from the passen-
ger section.
It can be positioned:
behind the rear seats A;
behind the front seats B.
The luggage net is desig-
ned to retain a maximum
weight of 10 kg.
Risk of injury.
Do not install the luggage
net in this position when a
passenger is occupying a
rear seat
A
B
1
2
3
5
4
3.36
LUGGAGE NET (2/2)
6
fix the net belt hook 9 onto the an-
choring points 10;
adjust net strap 8 so that it is taut.
The seatbacks must not touch the
luggage net.
Fitting the luggage net
behind the rear seats
Inside the vehicle on each side:
– lift cover 6 to access the luggage net
upper mounting rail;
insert upper rod 7 for the net into the
rail;
7
6
8
10
9
3.37
Accessing the mounting
points
Vehicles fitted with longitudinal roof
bars
The attachment inserts 2 are located on
the longitudinal roof bars 1.
ROOF BARS (1/2)
If original roof bars, ap-
proved by our Technical
Department, are supplied
with screws, only use these
screws for attaching the roof bars to
the vehicle.
3
Vehicles not fitted with longitudinal
roof bars
Open the doors to access the fixing
points 3.
1
2
3.38
ROOF BARS (2/2)/SPOILER
A
Spoiler A
It is forbidden to fix objects
and/or accessories (bike
racks, etc.) to the spoiler.
For information on the range of
equipment adapted to your vehi-
cle, we advise you to consult an ap-
proved Dealer.
Refer to the fitting instructions for in-
formation on how to fit roof bars and
conditions of use.
Please keep these instructions with
the rest of the vehicle documenta-
tion.
Maximum permissible load on
roof rack: refer to the information
on “Weights” in Section 6.
Precautions during use
Handling the tailgate
Before handling the tailgate, check the
objects and/or accessories (bike rack,
roof box, etc.) fitted to the roof bars:
these must be correctly positioned and
secured, so as not to hinder the opera-
tion of the tailgate.
3.39
MULTIMEDIA EQUIPMENT
Using the telephone
We remind you of the need
to conform to the legislation
in force concerning the use
of such equipment.
Hands-free telephone
integrated control
For equipped vehicles, use the steering
wheel controls 4.
Multimedia systems
1 Multimedia touchscreen;
2 Multimedia sockets;
3 Steering column controls;
4 Steering wheel controls;
5 Microphone.
1
2
4
3
Refer to the equipment instructions
for information on how to operate
this equipment.
5
3.40
4.1
Section 4: Maintenance
Bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2
Engine oil level: general information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4
Engine oil level: topping up/filling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5
Oil change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7
Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8
engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8
brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.9
windscreen washer reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.10
Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.10
Tyre pressure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.11
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.13
Bodywork maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.15
Interior trim maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.18
4.2
Opening the bonnet
Lift the bonnet up and release the stay 4
from its holder 5. For your own safety, it
is very important to fit the stay into its
retainer 3.
To open, press the control 1.
BONNET (1/2)
Unlocking the bonnet catch
To open, raise the bonnet slightly, then
lift the paddle 2 at the centre point of
the bonnet.
2
When working in the engine
compartment, ensure that
the windscreen wiper stalk
is in the park position.
Risk of injury.
Before performing any
action in the engine com-
partment, the ignition must
be switched off (please see
the information on “Starting, stop-
ping the engine” in Section 2).
3
4
5
1
Please note when work-
ing close to the engine that
it may be hot. The engine
cooling fan may also start
at any moment. The
warning
light in the engine compartment re-
minds you of this.
Risk of injury.
4.3
BONNET (2/2)
Closing the bonnet
Before closing the bonnet, make sure
that nothing has been left in the engine
compartment.
To close the bonnet, replace the stay 4
in its holder 5. Hold the middle of the
bonnet and guide it down to one foot
(30 cm) above the closed position, then
release. It will latch automatically under
its own weight.
After carrying out any work
in the engine compart-
ment, check that nothing
has been left behind (cloth,
tools, etc.).
These may damage the engine or
cause a fire.
Ensure that the bonnet is
properly locked.
Check that nothing is pre-
venting the catch from lock-
ing (gravel, cloth, etc.).
In the event of even a slight
impact involving the radia-
tor grille or bonnet, have
the bonnet lock checked by
an approved dealer as soon as pos-
sible.
4
5
4.4
Remove the dipstick and wipe with a
clean, lint-free cloth;
push the dipstick in as far as it will
go (for vehicles equipped with a cap-
type dipstick C, screw the cap in as
far as it will go);
take out the dipstick again;
read the level: it should never fall
below minimum mark A or exceed
maximum mark B.
Once the operation has been com-
pleted, ensure that the dipstick is
pushed in as far as it will go or that
the “cap-type dipstick” is completely
screwed in.
Reading the oil level
The oil level should be read with the ve-
hicle on level ground, after the engine
has been switched off for some time.
The dipstick must be used to read
the exact oil level and make sure
that the maximum level has not been
exceeded (risk of engine damage).
Refer to the following pages.
The instrument panel display only
alerts the driver when the oil level is at
its minimum.
It is normal for an engine to use oil for
lubrication and cooling of moving parts
and it is normal to top up the level be-
tween oil changes.
However, contact your approved
Dealer if more than 0.5 litres is being
consumed every 600 miles (1,000 km)
after the running in period.
Oil change frequency: check the oil
level from time to time and certainly
before any long journey to avoid the
risk of damaging your engine.
ENGINE OIL LEVEL: general information
A
B
A
B
C
Exceeding the maximum
engine oil level
Under no circumstances
must the maximum fill
level B be exceeded: risk of damage
to the engine and catalytic con-
verter.
If the level exceeds the maximum
level, do not start your vehicle and
contact an authorised dealer.
In order to prevent splashback, it is
recommended that a funnel be used
when topping up/filling with oil.
Before performing any
action in the engine com-
partment, the ignition must
be switched off (please see
the information on “Starting, stop-
ping the engine” in Section 2).
4.5
Topping up/filling
The vehicle must be parked on level
ground and the engine should be
stopped and cold (for instance, before
the engine is started up for the first time
in the day).
– Unscrew cap 1;
top up the level (as a guide, the ca-
pacity between the minimum and
maximum reading on the dipstick 2
is between 1.5 and 2 litres, depend-
ing on the engine);
wait for approximately 10 minutes to
allow the oil to flow into the engine;
check the level using the dipstick 2
(as described above).
Once the operation has been com-
pleted, ensure that the dipstick is
pushed in as far as it will go or that
the “cap-type dipstick” is completely
screwed in.
ENGINE OIL LEVEL: topping up, filling (1/3)
Do not exceed the max level and
do not forget to refit cap 1 and dip-
stick 2.
In order to prevent splashback, it is
recommended that a funnel be used
when topping up/filling with oil.
1
2
Before performing any
action in the engine com-
partment, the ignition must
be switched off (please see
the information on “Starting, stop-
ping the engine” in Section 2).
1
2
4.6
ENGINE OIL LEVEL: topping up, filling (2/3)
Do not exceed the max level and
do not forget to refit cap 1 and dip-
stick 2.
Before performing any
action in the engine com-
partment, the ignition must
be switched off (please see
the information on “Starting, stop-
ping the engine” in Section 2).
In order to prevent splashing, it is
recommended that a funnel be used
when topping up/filling the oil.
2
1
1
2
2
1
4.7
Engine oil grade
Refer to the maintenance document for
your vehicle.
ENGINE OIL LEVEL: topping up, filling (3/3)/OIL CHANGE
Never run the engine in an
enclosed space as exhaust
gases are poisonous.
Engine oil change: if you
are changing the oil when
the engine is hot, be care-
ful not to scald yourself as
the oil drains.
Filling: take care when
topping up the oil that
no oil drips onto engine
components - risk of fire.
Remember to refit the cap securely
as there is a risk of fire if oil splashes
onto hot engine components.
When working in the engine
compartment, ensure that
the windscreen wiper stalk
is in the park position.
Risk of injury.
Oil change
Service interval: refer to the
Maintenance Service Booklet for your
vehicle.
Oil change capacity
Please refer to the maintenance docu-
ment for your vehicle, or contact an au-
thorised dealer.
Always check the engine oil level using
the dipstick, as explained previously (it
should never fall below the minimum
level, or be over the maximum level on
the dipstick).
Consult your approved dealer at
once if you notice an abnormal or
repeated drop in any of the fluid
levels.
Exceeding the maximum
engine oil level
Under no circumstances
should maximum filling level
be exceeded: this could damage the
engine and the catalytic converter.
If the level exceeds the maximum
level, do not start your vehicle and
contact an authorised dealer.
Please note when work-
ing close to the engine that
it may be hot. The engine
cooling fan may also start
at any moment. The
warning
light in the engine compartment re-
minds you of this.
Risk of injury.
4.8
Top this level up when cold before it
reaches the MINI mark.
Frequency of checking coolant level
Check the coolant level regularly
(very severe damage is likely to be
caused to the engine if it runs out of
coolant).
If the level needs to be topped up, only
use products approved by our Technical
Department which ensure:
protection against freezing;
an anti-corrosion protection for the
cooling system.
Consult your approved dealer at
once if you notice an abnormal or
repeated drop in any of the fluid
levels.
No operations should be
carried out on the cooling
circuit when the engine is
hot.
Risk of burns.
Replacement interval
Refer to the Maintenance Document for
your vehicle.
Coolant
With the engine switched off and on
level ground, the level when cold must
be between the MINI and MAXI marks
on reservoir 1.
LEVELS (1/3)
1
When working in the engine
compartment, ensure that
the windscreen wiper stalk
is in the park position.
Risk of injury.
Before performing any
action in the engine com-
partment, the ignition must
be switched off (please see
the information on “Starting, stop-
ping the engine” in Section 2).
4.9
Level 2
It is normal for the level to drop as the
brake shoes become worn, but it must
never drop lower than the “MINI" warn-
ing line.
If you wish to check the disc and drum
wear yourself, you should obtain the
document explaining the checking pro-
cedure from the manufacturer’s net-
work or website.
Topping up
After any operation on the hydraulic cir-
cuit, a specialist must replace the brake
fluid.
Only use fluids approved by our
Technical Department (and taken from
a sealed container).
Replacement interval
Refer to the Maintenance Document for
your vehicle.
Brake fluid
The level should be read with the engine
switched off and on level ground.
This should be checked frequently,
and immediately if you notice even the
slightest loss in braking efficiency.
LEVELS (2/3)
2
Consult your approved dealer at
once if you notice an abnormal or
repeated drop in any of the fluid
levels.
Please note when work-
ing close to the engine that
it may be hot. The engine
cooling fan may also start
at any moment. The
warning
light in the engine compartment re-
minds you of this.
Risk of injury.
4.10
Liquid
Screen wash product (product with
antifreeze in winter).
Checking the level
Use the “dropper cap”. To do this, plug
the hole 4 with your finger, remove the
cap then read the gauge built into the
cap.
Note: Regularly check the reservoir
level by topping up the liquid before
taking a trip.
Jets
To adjust the windscreen washer jets,
please consult an authorised dealer.
Filters
The replacement of filter components
(air filter, cabin filter, diesel filter, etc.)
is scheduled in the maintenance opera-
tions for your vehicle.
Replacement intervals for filter el-
ements: refer to the Maintenance
Document for your vehicle.
Windscreen washer
reservoir
Topping up
With the engine switched off, open the
cap 3. Fill until you can see the fluid,
then replace the cap.
LEVELS (3/3)/FILTERS
3
When working in the engine
compartment, ensure that
the windscreen wiper stalk
is in the park position.
Risk of injury.
Before performing any
action in the engine com-
partment, the ignition must
be switched off (please see
the information on “Starting, stop-
ping the engine” in Section 2).
4
Please note when work-
ing close to the engine that
it may be hot. The engine
cooling fan may also start
at any moment. The
warning
light in the engine compartment re-
minds you of this.
Risk of injury.
4.11
TYRE PRESSURE (1/2)
B: dimension of the tyres fitted to the
vehicle.
C: intended driving speed.
D: recommended pressure for optimis-
ing fuel consumption.
NB: driving comfort may be altered.
A
C
D
FE
G
B
C
E
E
F
F
E: front tyre pressure.
F: rear tyre pressure.
G: tyre pressure for the emergency
spare wheel.
Vehicle fitted with a tyre pressure
monitoring system
In cases of under-inflation (puncture,
low pressure, etc.), warning light
lights up on the instrument panel.
Please refer to the information on the
“Tyre pressure monitoring system” in
Section 2.
Label A
Open the driver’s door to read it.
Tyre pressures should be checked
when the tyres are cold.
If the tyre pressures cannot be checked
when the tyres are cold, increase the
pressures from 0.2 to 0.3 bar (or 3 PSI).
Never deflate a hot tyre.
A
4.12
TYRE PRESSURES (2/2)
Special note concerning fully laden
vehicles (Maximum Permissible All-Up
Weight) and towing a trailer: the maxi-
mum speed must be limited to 60 mph
(100 kph) and the tyre pressure in-
creased by 0.2 bar.
Please refer to the information on
“Weights” in Section 6.
Tyre safety and use of snow chains:
Refer to the information on “Tyres” in
Section 5 for the servicing conditions
and, depending on the version, the use
of chains.
For your safety, please re-
spect the speed limit.
When they need to be re-
placed, only tyres of the
same make, size, type and profile
should be used on a single axle.
They must: either have a load ca-
pacity and speed rating at least
equal to those of the original
tyres, or conform to those recom-
mended by an authorised dealer.
Failure to heed these instructions
could endanger your safety and
affect your vehicle’s roadworthi-
ness.
Risk of loss of control of the ve-
hicle.
4.13
BATTERY (1/2)
1
Battery 1 does not require any mainte-
nance. You should not open it or add
any fluid.
Handle the battery with care
as it contains sulphuric acid
which must not come into
contact with the eyes or
skin. If it does, wash the affected
area with plenty of cold water. If
necessary, consult a doctor.
Ensure that naked flames, red hot
objects and sparks do not come into
contact with the battery as there is a
risk of explosion.
Depending on the vehicle, a system
continuously checks the battery charge
status. If this decreases, the message
“Battery low start engine” is displayed
on the instrument panel. In this case,
start the engine. The message will go
off.
The charge status of your battery can
decrease especially if you use your ve-
hicle:
for short journeys;
for driving in town;
when the temperature drops;
after extended use of energy-con-
suming devices (radio, etc.) with the
engine switched off.
Before performing any
action in the engine com-
partment, the ignition must
be switched off (please see
the information on “Starting, stop-
ping the engine” in Section 2).
Please note when work-
ing close to the engine that
it may be hot. The engine
cooling fan may also start
at any moment. The
warning
light in the engine compartment re-
minds you of this.
Risk of injury.
4.14
Replacing the battery
As this operation is complex, we advise
you to contact an approved Dealer.
BATTERY (2/2)
The battery is a specific
type, please ensure it is
replaced with the same
type. Consult an approved
dealer.
A
2 3 4
567
Label A
Observe the indications on the battery:
2 Naked flames and smoking are for-
bidden;
3 eye protection required;
4 keep away from children;
5 explosive materials;
6 refer to the handbook;
7 corrosive materials.
4.15
BODYWORK MAINTENANCE (1/3)
You should
Wash your car frequently, with the
engine off, with cleaning products rec-
ommended by the manufacturer (never
use abrasive products). Rinse thor-
oughly beforehand with a jet:
spots of tree resin and industrial
grime;
mud in the wheel arches and under-
neath the body which forms damp
patches;
bird droppings, which cause a
chemical reaction with the paint that
rapidly discolours paintwork and
may even cause the paint to peel
off;
wash the vehicle immediately to
remove these marks since it is im-
possible to remove them by polish-
ing;
salt, particularly in the wheel arches
and underneath the body after driv-
ing in areas where the roads have
been gritted.
Remove any plant matter (resin, leaves,
etc.) from the vehicle regularly.
A well-maintained vehicle will last
longer. It is therefore recommended to
maintain the exterior of the vehicle reg-
ularly.
Your vehicle has been treated with very
effective anti-corrosion products. It is
nevertheless subject to various outside
influences.
Corrosive agents in the atmosphere
atmospheric pollution (built-up and
industrial areas);
saline atmospheres (near the sea,
particularly in hot weather);
seasonal and damp weather condi-
tions (e.g. road salt in winter, water
from road cleaners, etc.).
Minor impacts
Abrasive action
Dust and sand in the air, mud, road grit
thrown up by other vehicles, etc.
You should take a number of minor pre-
cautions in order to safeguard your ve-
hicle against such risks.
Respect local regulations about wash-
ing vehicles (e.g. do not wash your ve-
hicle on a public highway).
Observe the vehicle stopping distances
when driving on gravelled surfaces to
prevent paint damage.
Repair, or have repaired quickly, areas
where the paint has been damaged, to
prevent corrosion spreading.
Remember to visit the body shop pe-
riodically in order to maintain your
anti-corrosion warranty. Refer to the
Maintenance Document.
If it is necessary to clean mechani-
cal components, hinges, etc., spray
them with products approved by our
Technical Department to protect them
after they have been cleaned.
We have selected special products
to care for your vehicle and you can
obtain these from the manufactur-
er’s accessory outlets.
4.16
BODYWORK MAINTENANCE (2/3)
Degrease or clean using
high-pressure cleaning
equipment or by spray-
ing on products not ap-
proved by our Technical
Department:
mechanical components (e.g.:
engine compartment);
underbody;
parts with hinges (e.g.: inside the
doors);
painted plastic external fittings (e.g.:
bumpers).
Doing this could give rise to corrosion
or operational faults.
What you should not do
Wash the vehicle in bright sunlight or
freezing temperatures.
Do not scrape off mud or dirt without
pre-wetting.
Allow dirt to accumulate on the exterior.
Allow rust to form following minor im-
pacts.
Do not use solvents not approved by
our Technical Department to remove
stains as this could damage the paint-
work.
Do not drive in snow or muddy condi-
tions without washing the vehicle, par-
ticularly under the wheel arches and
body.
4.17
Using a roller type car wash
Return the windscreen wiper stalk to
the Park position (refer to the informa-
tion on the “Windscreen washer, wiper”
in Section 1). Check the mounting of
external accessories, additional lights
and mirrors, and ensure that the wiper
blades are secured with adhesive tape.
Remove the radio aerial mast if your
vehicle is fitted with this equipment.
Remember to remove the tape and refit
the antenna after washing.
Vehicles with a matte paint
finish
This type of paint requires certain pre-
cautions.
You should do the following
Wash the vehicle by hand using plenty
of water, using a soft cloth or a gentle
sponge.
Do not do the following
Use wax-based products (polishing).
Rub too hard.
Wash the vehicle in a roller-type car
wash.
Attach stickers to the paintwork (risk of
leaving marks).
Wash the vehicle
using a high-pressure
cleaning device.
BODYWORK MAINTENANCE (3/3)
Cleaning the headlights
As the headlights are made of plastic
“glass”, use a soft cloth or cotton wool
to clean them. If this does not clean
them properly, moisten the cloth with
soapy water, then wipe clean with a soft
damp cloth or cotton wool.
Finally, carefully dry off with a soft dry
cloth.
Do not use cleaning products con-
taining alcohol or utensils (e.g.: a
scraper).
4.18
Glass instrument panel
(e.g. instrument panel, clock, exterior
temperature display, radio display, etc.)
Use a soft cloth (or cotton wool).
If this does not clean them properly,
use a soft cloth (or cotton wool) slightly
moistened with soapy water and then
wipe clean with another soft damp cloth
or cotton wool.
Finally, carefully dry off with a soft dry
cloth.
Do not use products containing alco-
hol and/or spray fluids on the area.
Seat belts
These must be kept clean.
Use products selected by our Technical
Department (Approved outlets) or
warm, soapy water and a sponge and
wipe with a dry cloth.
Detergents or dyes must not be used
under any circumstances.
INTERIOR TRIM MAINTENANCE (1/2)
Textiles (seats, door trim, etc)
Vacuum-clean the textiles regularly.
Liquid stain
Use soapy water.
Dab lightly (never rub) with a soft cloth,
rinse and remove the excess.
Solid or pasty stain
Carefully remove the excess solid or
pasty material immediately with a
spatula (working from the edges to the
centre to avoid spreading the stain).
Clean as for a liquid stain.
Special instructions for sweets or
chewing gum
Put an ice cube on the stain to solidify
it, then proceed as for a solid stain.
A well-maintained vehicle will last
longer. It is therefore recommended to
maintain the interior of the vehicle regu-
larly.
A stain should always be dealt with
swiftly.
Whatever type of stain is on the trim,
use cold (or warm) soapy water with
natural soap.
Detergents (washing-up liquid, pow-
dered products, alcohol-based prod-
ucts) should not be used.
Use a soft cloth.
Rinse and soak up the excess.
For further recommendations for
maintaining the interior, and/or for
any unsatisfactory results, please
see an authorised dealer.
4.19
You should not:
Position objects such as deodorants,
scents etc. near air vents as this could
damage your dashboard trim.
Use high-pressure
cleaning equipment or
sprays inside the pas-
senger compartment:
without careful use, this equipment
could impair the correct functioning
of the electrical or electronic compo-
nents in the vehicle, or have other
detrimental effects.
INTERIOR TRIM MAINTENANCE (2/2)
Removal/replacing removable
equipment originally fitted in
the vehicle
If you need to remove equipment in
order to clean the passenger com-
partment (for example, mats), always
ensure that they are correctly refitted
and are the right way around (the driv-
er’s mat should be fitted on the driver’s
side, etc.) and fit them with the compo-
nents supplied with the equipment (for
example, the driver mat should always
be fixed using the pre-fitted mounting
components).
With the vehicle stationary, always
ensure that nothing will impede driving
(anything obstructing the pedals, heel
wedged by the mat etc.).
4.20
5.1
Section 5: Practical advice
Puncture, emergency spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2
Tyre inflation kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.7
Wheel trims - wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.8
Changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.9
Tyres (tyre and wheel safety, use in winter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.11
Headlights (changing bulbs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.14
Rear lights and side lights (replacing bulbs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.17
Interior lighting (changing bulbs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.20
RENAULT card: battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.22
Radio frequency remote control: batteries. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.23
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.24
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.27
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.29
Wipers (replacing blades) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.30
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.32
Operating faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.34
5.2
In case of puncture
Depending on the vehicle, a tyre infla-
tion kit or emergency spare wheel is
provided (refer to the following pages).
Special note
The Tyre Pressure Monitor function
does not check the emergency spare
wheel (the wheel replaced by the emer-
gency spare wheel disappears from the
instrument panel display).
Refer to the information on the “Tyre
pressure monitoring system” in
Section 2.
PUNCTURE, EMERGENCY SPARE WHEEL (1/2)
If the emergency spare wheel has been stored for several years, have it
checked by your Dealer to ensure that it is safe to use.
Vehicles fitted with an emergency spare wheel smaller than the
four other wheels:
Never fit more than one emergency spare wheel to the same vehicle.
As the punctured wheel is wider than the emergency spare wheel, the vehicle’s
ground clearance is reduced.
Replace the emergency spare wheel as soon as possible with a wheel with the
same dimensions as the original.
When this is fitted to the vehicle, which must only be a temporary measure, the
driving speed must not exceed the speed indicated on the label on the wheel.
Fitting an emergency spare wheel may alter the way the vehicle usually runs.
Avoid sudden acceleration or deceleration and reduce your speed when cor-
nering.
If you need to use snow chains, fit the emergency spare wheel to the rear axle
and check the tyre pressure.
5.3
Emergency spare wheel A
To get to it:
open the tailgate;
– Depending on the vehicle, lift up the
mobile floor;
lift the boot carpet;
remove the tool kit by lifting it by its
handles;
unscrew the central mounting;
remove the emergency spare wheel.
Note: Store the punctured wheel in the
storage bag provided, along with the
tool kit and put them in the boot.
PUNCTURE, EMERGENCY SPARE WHEEL (2/2)
If the vehicle is parked on
the hard shoulder, you must
warn other road users of
your vehicle’s presence
with a warning triangle or with other
devices as per the legislation apply-
ing to the country you are in.
A
5.4
TYRE PRESSURE KIT (1/3)
The kit is only approved for
inflating the tyres of the ve-
hicle originally equipped
with the kit.
It must never be used to inflate
the tyres of another vehicle, or any
other inflatable object (rubber ring,
rubber boat, etc.).
Avoid spillage on skin when han-
dling the repair product bottle. If
droplets do leak out, rinse them off
with plenty of water.
Keep the repair kit away from chil-
dren.
Do not dispose of the empty bottle
in the countryside. Return it to your
approved dealer or to a recycling or-
ganisation.
The bottle has a limited service
life which is indicated on its label.
Check the expiry date.
Contact an approved dealer to re-
place the inflation tube and repair
product bottle.
A
B
The kit repairs tyres when
tread A has been dam-
aged by objects smaller
than 4 mm. It cannot repair
all types of puncture, such as cuts
larger than 4 mm, or cuts in tyre
sidewall B.
Ensure also that the wheel rim is in
good condition.
Do not pull out the foreign body
causing the puncture if it is still in
the tyre.
Do not attempt to use the
inflation kit if the tyre has
been damaged as a result
of driving with a puncture.
You should therefore carefully check
the condition of the tyre sidewalls
before any operation.
Driving with underinflated, flat or
punctured tyres can be dangerous
and may make the tyre impossible
to repair.
This repair is temporary.
A tyre which has been punctured
should always be inspected (and re-
paired, where possible) as soon as
possible by a specialist.
When taking a tyre which has been
repaired using this kit to be replaced,
you must inform the specialist.
When driving, vibration may be felt
due to the presence of the repair
product injected into the tyre.
5.5
TYRE PRESSURE KIT (2/3)
In the event of a puncture, use the kit
located in the boot, underneath the
boot carpet.
With the engine running and the
parking brake applied,
Unscrew the cap from recess 3 on
the bottle;
unscrew the bottle cap 2;
screw the bottle 2 onto the compres-
sor at the bottle recess point 3;
unscrew the valve cap on the rele-
vant wheel and screw the inflation
adapter 6 onto the valve;
disconnect any accessories previ-
ously connected to the vehicle’s ac-
cessories sockets;
– the plug 4 must be connected to the
vehicle accessories socket;
– press switch 5 to inflate the tyre to
the recommended pressure (please
refer to the information in the section
on “Tyre pressure”);
Before using this kit, park
the vehicle at a sufficient
distance from traffic, switch
on the hazard warning
lights, apply the handbrake, ask all
passengers to leave the vehicle and
keep them away from traffic.
If the vehicle is parked on
the hard shoulder, you must
warn other road users of
your vehicle’s presence
with a warning triangle or with other
devices as per the legislation apply-
ing to the country you are in.
after a maximum of 10 minutes, stop
inflating and read the pressure (on
pressure gauge 1).
Note: while the container is empty-
ing (approximately 30 seconds), the
pressure gauge 5 will briefly indicate
a pressure of up to 6 bar. The pres-
sure will then drop.
adjust the pressure: to increase it,
continue inflating with the kit.
If the recommended pressure of
1.8 bar cannot be achieved after
10 minutes, repair is impossible. Do
not drive the vehicle. Consult an au-
thorised dealer.
4
2
1
3
5
6
5.6
TYRE PRESSURE KIT (3/3)
Once the tyre is correctly inflated,
remove the kit: slowly unscrew the in-
flation adapter 6 to prevent any repair
product from escaping and store the
container in plastic packaging to pre-
vent the product from escaping.
Affix the driving recommendation
label to the dashboard where it can
easily be seen by the driver;
Put the kit away.
At the end of this initial inflation op-
eration, air will still escape from the
tyre. You must drive a short distance
in order to seal the hole.
Start immediately and drive at be-
tween 12 and 40 mph (20 and
60 km/h) in order to distribute the
product evenly in the tyre and, after
driving for 2 miles (3 km), stop and
check the pressure.
If the pressure is greater than 1.3 bar
but less than the recommended
pressure (refer to the label affixed to
the edge of the driver’s door), read-
just it. Otherwise, please contact an
authorised dealer: the tyre cannot be
repaired.
Precautions when using the
kit
The kit should not be operated for more
than 10 consecutive minutes.
Nothing should be placed
around the driver’s feet
as such objects may slide
under the pedals during
sudden braking manoeuvres and
obstruct their use.
Please be aware that a
poorly tightened or miss-
ing valve cap can make the
tyres less airtight and may
lead to pressure loss.
Always use valve caps identical to
those fitted originally and tighten
them fully.
Following repair with the kit,
do not travel further than
120 miles (200 km). In addi-
tion, reduce your speed and
under no circumstances exceed
48 mph (80 km/h). The sticker,
which you must affix in a prominent
position on the dashboard, reminds
you of this.
Depending on the country or local
legislation, a tyre repaired with the
inflation kit may need to be replaced.
6
5.7
Jack 2
Fold it correctly before refitting it in its
housing (ensure that the wheelbrace is
correctly positioned).
Lever 3
This tightens or releases the tow eye 5.
Hubcap tool 4
This tool is used to remove the wheel
trims.
Tow eye 5
Please see “Towing: breakdown recov-
ery” in Section 5.
Wheelbrace 1
Locks or unlocks the wheel bolts and
tow eye 5.
The presence of the tools depends on
the vehicle.
The tools are located in a tray under the
boot carpet.
Lift the cover and remove them.
TOOLS
Do not leave the tools unsecured inside the vehicle as they may come loose under braking. After use, check that all the
tools are correctly clipped into the tool kit, then position it correctly in its housing: there is a risk of injury.
If wheel bolts are supplied in the tool kit, you must use these bolts only for the emergency spare wheel: refer to the
label affixed to the emergency spare wheel.
The jack is designed for wheel changing purposes only. Under no circumstances should it be used for carrying out repairs un-
derneath the vehicle or to gain access to the underside of the vehicle.
2
1
3
4
5
5.8
Remove the wheel trim using hubcap
tool 1 (located in the tool kit) by en-
gaging the hook in the opening near
valve 2.
To refit it, align it with valve 2. Push the
retaining hooks in fully, starting with
side A near the valve, followed by B
and C, finishing at D opposite the valve.
WHEEL TRIMS - WHEEL
Do not leave the tools un-
secured inside the vehicle
as they may come loose
under braking. After use,
check that all the tools are correctly
clipped into the tool kit, then posi-
tion it correctly in its housing: risk of
injury.
1
2
A
B
D
C
5.9
Continue to crank the jack so that the
baseplate is correctly positioned (it
should be underneath the vehicle and
aligned with the jack head).
Switch on the hazard warn-
ing lights.
Keep the vehicle away from
traffic and on a level surface
where it will not slip.
Apply the parking brake and engage
a gear (first or reverse, or P for auto-
matic transmissions).
Ask all the passengers to leave the
vehicle and keep them away from
traffic.
CHANGING A WHEEL (1/2)
Vehicles equipped with a jack
and wheelbrace
If necessary, remove the wheel trim.
Use the wheelbrace 1 to slacken off the
wheel bolts. Position it so as to be able
to push from above.
Crank up the jack 3 by hand to align
the jack head between the 2 jacking
points 2 closest to the relevant wheel.
If the vehicle is not equipped with a
jack or wheelbrace, you can obtain
these from your approved dealer.
If the vehicle is parked on
the hard shoulder, you must
warn other road users of
your vehicle’s presence
with a warning triangle or with other
devices as per the legislation apply-
ing to the country you are in.
1
2
3
5.10
If you have a puncture, re-
place the wheel as soon as
possible.
A tyre which has been punc-
tured should always be inspected
(and repaired, where possible) by a
specialist.
CHANGING A WHEEL (2/2)
Turn it a few times to lift the wheel off
the ground.
Undo the bolts and take off the wheel.
Fit the emergency spare wheel on the
central hub and turn it to locate the
mounting holes in the wheel and the
hub.
Tighten the bolts, checking that the
wheel is correctly positioned on its hub.
Lower the jack.
With the wheel on the ground, tighten
the bolts fully and have the tightness of
the bolts checked and the emergency
spare wheel pressure checked as soon
as possible.
Do not leave the tools un-
secured inside the vehicle
as they may come loose
under braking. After use,
check that all the tools are correctly
clipped into the tool kit, then posi-
tion it correctly in its housing: risk of
injury.
If wheel bolts are supplied in the
tool kit, only use these bolts for the
emergency spare wheel: refer to the
label affixed to the emergency spare
wheel.
The jack is designed for wheel
changing purposes only. Under no
circumstances should it be used for
carrying out repairs underneath the
vehicle or to gain access to the un-
derside of the vehicle.
5.11
TYRES (1/3)
Maintaining the tyres
The tyres must be in good condition
and the tread form must have sufficient
depth; tyres approved by our Technical
Department have tread wear indica-
tors 1 which are indicators moulded
into the tread at several points.
The tyres are the only contact between
the vehicle and the road, so it is essen-
tial to keep them in good condition.
You must make sure that your tyres
conform to local road traffic regulations.
When the tread has worn down to the
wear warning strips, these strips will
become visible 2: it is then necessary
to replace your tyres because the tread
rubber is now only 1.6 mm deep at
most, resulting in poor road holding
on wet roads.
An overloaded vehicle, long journeys
by motorway, particularly in very hot
weather, or continual driving on poorly
surfaced minor roads will lead to more
rapid tyre wear and affect safety.
Incidents which occur when
driving, such as striking the
kerb, may damage the tyres
and wheel rims, and could
also lead to misalignment of the
front or rear axle geometry. In this
case, have the condition of these
checked by an approved dealer.
2
1
5.12
TYRES (2/3)
Tyre pressures
Adhere to the tyre pressures (including
the emergency spare wheel). The tyre
pressures should be checked at least
once a month and additionally before
any long journey (refer to the label af-
fixed to the edge of the driver’s door).
The pressures should be checked cold:
ignore higher pressures which may be
reached in hot weather or following a
high speed journey.
If the tyre pressures cannot be checked
when the tyres are cold, increase the
pressures from 0.2 to 0.3 bar (or 3 PSI).
Never deflate a hot tyre.
Special note
Depending on the vehicle, there may
be an adapter which needs to be posi-
tioned on the valve before air is added.
Vehicle fitted with a tyre pressure
monitoring system
In cases of under-inflation (puncture,
low pressure, etc.), warning light
lights up on the instrument panel.
Please refer to the information on the
“Tyre pressure monitoring system” in
Section 2.
Emergency spare wheel
Refer to the information on “Puncture”
and “Changing a wheel” in Section 5.
Incorrect tyre pressures
lead to abnormal tyre wear
and unusually hot running.
These are factors which
may seriously affect safety and lead
to:
poor road holding,
risk of bursting or tread separa-
tion.
The pressure depends on the load
and the speed of use. Adjust the
pressure according to the condi-
tions of use (refer to the label affixed
to the edge of the driver’s door).
Please be aware that a
poorly tightened or miss-
ing valve cap can make the
tyres less airtight and lead
to pressure loss.
Always use valve caps identical to
those fitted originally and tighten
them fully.
Changing a wheel
As the tyre pressure moni-
tor may take several min-
utes to correctly determine
the positions of the wheels and the
pressure values after driving, check
the tyre pressures following any op-
eration.
5.13
TYRES (3/3)
Use in winter
Chains
For safety reasons, fitting snow
chains to the rear axle is strictly for-
bidden.
Chains cannot be fitted to tyres which
are larger than those originally fitted to
the vehicle.
Snow or Winter tyres
We would recommend that these be
fitted to all four wheels to ensure that
your vehicle retains maximum adhe-
sion.
Warning: These tyres sometimes have
a specific direction of rotation and a
maximum speed index which may be
lower than the maximum speed of your
vehicle.
Snow chains may only be
fitted to tyres of the same
size as those originally
fitted to your vehicle.
In all cases, we would recommend
that you contact an authorised
dealer who will be able to advise you
on the choice of equipment which is
most suitable for your vehicle.
Studded tyres
This type of equipment may only be
used for a limited period and as laid
down by local legislation. It is neces-
sary to observe the speed specified by
current legislation.
These tyres must, at a minimum, be
fitted to the two front wheels.
18” wheels and larger
cannot be fitted with
chains.
If you wish to use special
equipment, consult an approved
dealer.
Fitting new tyres
For your safety, please re-
spect the speed limit.
When they need to be re-
placed, only tyres of the
same make, size, type and profile
should be used on a single axle.
They must: either have a load ca-
pacity and a speed capacity at
least equal to the original tyres,
or correspond to those recom-
mended by your authorised
dealer.
Failure to heed these instructions
could endanger your safety and
affect your vehicle’s roadworthi-
ness.
Risk of loss of control of the ve-
hicle.
5.14
On the right-hand side of the vehicle,
you will need to remove the filler neck 4
for the windscreen washer tank to
access the bulbs. To do this:
unscrew the funnel 4;
pull the funnel 4.
After replacing the bulbs, you must put
the air duct A back into position. To do
this, perform the above operation in re-
verse.
FRONT HEADLIGHTS: changing bulbs (1/3)
Before performing any
action in the engine com-
partment, the ignition must
be switched off (please see
the information on “Starting, stop-
ping the engine” in Section 2).
Accessing the bulbs
On the left-hand side of the vehicle,
you will need to remove the air duct A
to access the bulbs. To do this:
remove the clips 3;
unscrew the bolt 2;
press the upper part of the fastening
clips 1 to release the air duct A;
slide the air duct A towards the front
of the vehicle to release it.
4
3
2
A
1
Please note when work-
ing close to the engine that
it may be hot. The engine
cooling fan may also start
at any moment. The
warning
light in the engine compartment re-
minds you of this.
Risk of injury.
5.15
FRONT HEADLIGHTS: changing bulbs (2/3)
Halogen main beam headlight
To change the bulb:
– remove cover C;
turn the bulb holder a quarter turn 7;
remove the bulb.
Bulb type: H7.
It is essential to use anti-U.V. 55W
bulbs so as not to damage the plastic
on the headlights.
Do not touch the bulb glass. Hold it
by its base.
When the bulb has been changed,
make sure you refit the cover correctly.
6
7
Halogen dipped beam
headlight
To change the bulb:
– remove cover B;
turn the bulb holder a quarter turn 6;
remove the bulb.
Bulb type: H7.
C
B
Direction indicator lights
Turn the bulb holder 5 a quarter of a
turn and take out the bulb.
Bulb type: PY21W.
Once the bulb has been replaced,
check that it is properly secured.
5
The bulbs are under pres-
sure and can break when
replaced.
Risk of injury.
5.16
Front fog lights 10
The front bumper needs to be removed;
consult an approved Dealer.
Type of bulb: H11.
The bulbs are under pres-
sure and can break when
replaced.
Risk of injury.
FRONT HEADLIGHTS: changing bulbs (3/3)
To comply with local legislation, or
as a precaution, you can obtain an
emergency kit containing a set of
spare bulbs and fuses from an ap-
proved dealer.
Any operation on (or modi-
fication to) the electrical
system must be performed
by an approved dealer
since an incorrect connection might
damage the electrical equipment
(harness, components and in partic-
ular the alternator). In addition, your
Dealer has all the parts required for
fitting these units.
LED dipped beam/main beam
headlights 9
Please see an authorised dealer.
Daytime running lights and
side lights 8
Please see an authorised dealer.
10
Additional lights
If you wish to fit fog lights to your ve-
hicle, please see an authorised dealer.
8
9
5.17
REAR AND SIDE LIGHTS: changing bulbs (1/3)
Side lights and brake lights
Consult an approved Dealer.
Direction indicators 1
Open the boot lid.
From inside the boot, unclip the cover
to access the screw 2 then unscrew it.
From the outside, undo the screws 3.
Pull on the outside A of the light and
remove the rear light unit.
1
Turn the bulb holder a quarter of a
turn 4.
Remove the bulb.
Bulb type: PY21.
Refit the bulb holder and push the unit
as far as it will go, until it locks into
place.
Check that the light is properly locked
in position.
Tighten screws 3.
Tighten the screw 2 and put the cover
back into position.
3
A
4
2
5.18
Reversing lights
From the boot, unclip the cover on the
interior trim of the boot lid 5 using a
screwdriver or similar tool.
Replace the bulb 6.
Bulb type: H21W.
Refitting
To refit, proceed in the reverse order,
taking care not to damage the wiring.
The bulbs are under pres-
sure and can break when
replaced.
Risk of injury.
REAR AND SIDE LIGHTS: changing bulbs (2/3)
6
5
5.19
Number plate lights 9
Unclip the light 9 (using a tool such
as a flat-blade screwdriver).
remove the light cover to gain access
to the bulb.
Bulb type: W5W.
REAR AND SIDE LIGHTS: changing bulbs (3/3)
The bulbs are under pres-
sure and can break when
replaced.
Risk of injury.
Side indicator lights 10
The wing mirror needs to be removed;
consult an authorised dealer.
Bulb type: W5W.
10
High level brake light 7
Consult an approved dealer.
Rear fog lights 8
The front bumper needs to be removed;
consult an authorised dealer.
Bulb type: P21W.
7
8
9
5.20
INTERIOR LIGHTING: changing bulbs (1/2)
Map reading lights 1
Please consult an authorised dealer.
1
4
Glove box light 4
Using a flat-blade screwdriver or simi-
lar, unclip the light 4 by pressing the
tab located on one side of the light to
access the bulb.
Bulb type: W5W.
The bulbs are under pres-
sure and can break when
replaced.
Risk of injury.
Lights 2
(depending on vehicle)
Using a flat-blade screwdriver or simi-
lar, unclip the light 2 by pressing the
tab located on one side of the light to
access the bulb.
Bulb type: W5W.
Lights 3
(depending on vehicle)
Please consult an authorised dealer.
2
3
5.21
6 7 8
The bulbs are under pres-
sure and can break when
replaced.
Risk of injury.
5
Luggage compartment light 5
Unclip light 5 by pressing the tabs on
each side (using a flat-blade screw-
driver or similar).
Disconnect the light.
Press tab 6 to release lens 8 and
access bulb 7.
Bulb type: W5W.
INTERIOR LIGHTING: changing bulbs (2/2)
5.22
Operating faults
If the battery is too weak to ensure cor-
rect operation, you can still start and
lock/unlock the vehicle (please refer to
the information on “Locking/unlocking
the opening elements” in Section 1).
RENAULT CARD: battery
Replacing the battery
When the message “Keycard battery
low” appears on the instrument panel,
replace the battery in the RENAULT
card:
slide the rear casing 1 downwards
while pressing on zone A;
remove the battery cover 2;
remove the battery by pressing on
one side and lifting the other;
replace it according to the direc-
tion and template shown inside the
cover.
Do not throw away your
used batteries; give them to
an organisation responsible
for collecting and recycling
batteries.
When refitting, proceed in the reverse
order, then press one of the buttons on
the card four times, close to the vehicle:
the message will disappear.
Note: it is not advisable to touch the
electronic circuit or contacts on the
RENAULT card when replacing the bat-
tery.
The batteries are available from ap-
proved Dealers, and their service
life approximately two years. Check
that there is no dye on the battery:
risk of an incorrect electrical con-
tact.
2
A
1
5.23
Replacing the battery
Open the case at slot 1 using a flat-
blade screwdriver or similar, and re-
place the battery 2, observing the po-
larity shown on the back of the cover.
Note: It is not advisable to touch the
electronic circuit in the key cover when
replacing the battery.
Do not throw away your
used batteries; give them to
an organisation responsible
for collecting and recycling
batteries.
RADIO FREQUENCY REMOTE CONTROL: batteries
When refitting, ensure that the cover
is correctly clipped on and the screw
tightened.
The batteries are available from ap-
proved Dealers, and their service
life approximately two years.
Check that there is no dye on the
battery: risk of an incorrect electri-
cal contact.
2
1
1
5.24
FUSES (1/3)
A
B
In accordance with local legislation
or as a precautionary measure:
obtain an emergency kit containing
a set of spare bulbs and fuses from
an approved Dealer.
C
Fuses in passenger compartment C
on the right-hand side of the vehicle
Unclip the cover C using a screwdriver
or similar.
If any electrical component does not
work, check the condition of the fuses.
Fuses in passenger compartment
A or B on the left-hand side of the
vehicle
Unclip the cover A using a screwdriver
or similar.
Open the glovebox and unclip the
flap B.
5.25
FUSES (2/3)
1
Clip 1
Remove the fuse using tweezers 1, lo-
cated on the fuse plate.
To remove the fuse from the tweezers,
slide the fuse to the side.
It is not advisable to use the free fuse
locations.
Do not touch the wiring harnesses
or the connectors.
Use the fuse allocation label in the stor-
age compartment A, B or C to identify
the fuses.
Certain fuses should only be replaced
by a qualified professional. These fuses
are not listed on the label.
Only change the fuses represented on
the label.
Check the fuse in question
and replace it, if neces-
sary, by a fuse of the same
rating.
If a fuse is fitted where the rating is
too high, it may cause the electrical
circuit to overheat (risk of fire) in the
event of an item of equipment using
an excessive amount of current.
5.26
FUSES (3/3)
Allocation of fuses
(the presence of certain fuses depends on the vehicle equipment level)
Symbol Allocation Symbol Allocation
D
Indicators
Steering column controls
ß
Brake light
ñ
Heated seats
Audio amplifier
C
Heated rear screen
N
Door locking/unlocking
Electric door mirror
f
Wipers
ë
Accessories sockets
Z
Interior lighting, courtesy mirror, rain and
light sensor, electric rear view mirrors, air
conditioning, ECO mode
Passenger compartment central unit, speed
limiter/cruise control, diagnostics socket, electric
windows, 4-wheel drive transmission (4WD)
î
Radio, multifunction screen, multimedia sockets
5.27
BATTERY: troubleshooting (1/2)
To avoid all risk of sparks:
Ensure that any consumers (cour-
tesy lights, etc.) are switched off
before disconnecting or reconnect-
ing the battery;
when charging, stop the charger
before connecting or disconnecting
the battery;
to avoid creating a short circuit be-
tween the terminals, do not place
metal objects on the battery;
always wait at least one minute after
the engine has been switched off
before disconnecting a battery;
make sure that you reconnect the
battery terminals after refitting.
Connecting a battery charger
The battery charger must be com-
patible with a battery with nominal
voltage of 12 volts.
Do not disconnect the battery when the
engine is running. Follow the instruc-
tions given by the manufacturer of
the battery charger you are using.
Special procedures may be
required to charge some
batteries. Contact your ap-
proved dealer.
Avoid all risk of sparks which may
cause an immediate explosion, and
charge the battery in a well venti-
lated area. Risk of serious injury.
Before performing any
action in the engine com-
partment, the ignition must
be switched off (please see
the information on “Starting, stop-
ping the engine” in Section 2).
Please note when work-
ing close to the engine that
it may be hot. The engine
cooling fan may also start
at any moment. The
warning
light in the engine compartment re-
minds you of this.
Risk of injury.
Handle the battery with care
as it contains sulphuric acid,
which must not come into
contact with eyes or skin. If
it does, wash the affected area with
plenty of cold water. If necessary,
consult a doctor.
Keep naked flames, red hot objects
and sparks away from the battery
components as there is a risk of
explosion.
5.28
Starting the vehicle using the
battery from another vehicle
If you have to use the battery from an-
other vehicle to start, obtain suitable
jump leads (with a large cross section)
from an approved dealer or, if you al-
ready have jump leads, ensure that
they are in perfect condition.
The two batteries must have an iden-
tical nominal voltage of 12 volts. The
battery supplying the current should
have a capacity (amp-hours, Ah) which
is at least the same as that of the dis-
charged battery.
Ensure that there is no risk of contact
between the two vehicles (risk of short
circuiting when the positive terminals
are connected) and that the discharged
battery is properly connected. Switch
off your vehicle ignition.
Start the engine of the vehicle supply-
ing the current and run it at a moderate
speed.
BATTERY: troubleshooting (2/2)
1
B
A
Lift the cover and then the red terminal
cap 1 (+).
Connect the positive cable A to the ter-
minal 1 (+), then to the terminal 4 (+) of
the battery supplying the current.
Connect the negative cable B to the
terminal 3 (–) of the battery supplying
the current and then to the terminal 2
(–).
Start the engine, and as soon as it starts
running, disconnect cables A and B in
reverse order ( 2 - 3 - 4 - 1).
2
4
3
2
Check that there is no con-
tact between leads A and B
and that the positive lead A
is not touching any metal
parts on the vehicle supplying the
current.
Risk of injury and/or damage to
the vehicle.
1
1
5.29
ACCESSORIES
Electrical and electronic accessories
Before installing this type of accessory (particularly for transmitters/receivers: frequency bandwidth, power level, po-
sition of the aerial, etc.), make sure it is compatible with your vehicle. You can get advice from an authorised dealer.
Connect accessories with a maximum power of 120 Watts only. Fire hazard. When several accessory sockets are
used at the same time, the total power of the connected accessories must not exceed 180 watts.
No work may be carried out on the vehicle’s electrical or radio circuits, except by authorised dealers: an incorrectly connected
system may result in damage being caused to the electrical equipment and/or the components connected to it.
If the vehicle is fitted with any aftermarket electrical equipment, make sure that the installation is correctly protected by a fuse.
Establish the rating and position of this fuse.
Using the diagnostic socket
The use of electronic accessories on the diagnostic socket may cause serious disturbance to the vehicle’s electronic systems.
For your safety we recommend that you use only electronic accessories approved by the manufacturer, consult an Approved
Dealer. Serious accident risk.
Use of transmitting/receiving devices (telephones, CB equipment etc.).
Telephones and CB equipment with integrated aerials may cause interference to the electronic systems originally fitted to the
vehicle: it is advisable only to use equipment with an external aerial. Furthermore, we remind you of the need to conform
to the legislation in force concerning the use of such equipment.
Fitting aftermarket accessories
If you wish to install accessories on the vehicle: please contact an authorised dealer. Also, to ensure the correct operation of
your vehicle, and to avoid any risk to your safety, we recommend that you use only accessories specifically designed for your
vehicle, which are the only accessories for which the manufacturer will provide a warranty.
If you are using an anti-theft device, only attach it to the brake pedal.
Obstructions to the driver
On the driver’s side, only use mats suitable for the vehicle, attached with the pre-fitted components, and check the fitting regu-
larly. Do not lay one mat on top of another. There is a risk of wedging the pedals.
5.30
WINDSCREEN WIPER BLADES: replacement (1/2)
Windscreen wiper blades 1
With the ignition on and the engine
switched off, lower the windscreen
wiper stalk fully: the blades stop slightly
away from the bonnet.
Lift the wiper arm 3, press the tab 2 and
push the blade to release it.
1
2
3
Refitting
Slide the blade along the arm until
it clips on. Check that it is correctly
locked in place. Lower the windscreen
wiper arm carefully.
With the ignition on, return the wind-
screen wiper stalk to the stop position.
NB: Before restarting your vehicle,
lower the windscreen wiper blades
onto the windscreen to avoid any risk
of damaging the bonnet or the wipers.
In frosty weather, make
sure that the wiper blades
are not stuck by ice (to
avoid the risk of the motor
overheating or damaging the
blades).
Check the condition of the wiper
blades.
Replace the wiper blades as soon
as they begin to lose efficiency
(approximately once a year).
Whilst changing the blade, take care
not to drop the arm onto the window
after it has been removed as this
may break the window.
Do not activate the wipers on a dry
screen. This will lead to premature
wear or damage to the blades.
5.31
WINDSCREEN WIPER BLADES: replacement (2/2)
Keep monitoring the condition of the
wiper blades. How long they last de-
pends on you:
clean the blades, windscreen and
rear screen regularly with soapy
water;
do not use them when the wind-
screen or rear screen are dry;
free them from the windscreen or
rear screen when they have not
been used for a long time.
4
5
A
B
6
To refit
To refit the wiper blade, proceed in re-
verse order to removal. Make sure that
the blade is correctly locked in position.
Rear screen wiper blade 4
Stalk in stop position (deactivated):
Lift the wiper arm 6;
pivot wiper blade 4 until some resist-
ance is met (movement B);
– depending on the vehicle, press
tab 5, then remove the wiper blade
by pulling it (movement A).
Before changing the rear
wiper blade, make sure the
stalk is in the stop position
(deactivated).
Risk of injury.
5.32
TOWING: breakdown recovery (1/2)
Before towing, put the gearbox in neu-
tral, unlock the steering column and re-
lease the parking brake.
For vehicles fitted with an automa-
tic gearbox, if it is not possible to put
the gear lever into position N, please
consult an authorised dealer.
Steering column unlocking
Insert the key into the ignition or, de-
pending on the vehicle, having the
RENAULT card on you, press the
engine start button for approximately
2 seconds.
Reposition the lever to neutral (posi-
tion N for vehicles fitted with an auto-
matic gearbox).
The steering column unlocks, the ac-
cessory functions are powered: you
can use the vehicle’s lights (direction
indicators, brake lights, etc.). At night
the vehicle must have its lights on.
Depending on the vehicle, once you
have finished towing, press the engine
start button twice (risk of running down
the battery).
The speed specified by current legis-
lation for towing must always be ob-
served. If your vehicle is the towing
vehicle, do not exceed the maximum
towing weight for your vehicle (refer to
the information on “Weights” in Section
6).
Towing a vehicle with an
automatic gearbox
Transport the vehicle on a trailer or tow
it with the front wheels off the ground.
In exceptional circumstances, you
may tow it with all four wheels on the
ground, only in a forward gear, with
the gear in neutral position N over a
maximum distance of 50 miles (80 km)
and not exceeding a speed of 16 mph
(25 km/h).
1
2
Do not remove the key from
the ignition when the vehi-
cle is being towed.
If the lever is stuck in P, even though
you are depressing the brake pedal, the
lever can be released manually. To do
this, insert a tool (with a hard rod to it)
into the slot 1 and press the button 2 at
the same time to unlock the lever.
Contact an authorised dealer as soon
as possible.
5.33
TOWING: breakdown recovery (2/2)
Only use the front 5 and rear 8 towing
points
(never use the drive shafts or any other
part of the vehicle).
These towing points may only be used
for towing: never use them for lifting the
vehicle directly or indirectly.
Access to towing points
Unclip cover 4 or 7 by inserting a flat-
blade screwdriver or similar under the
cover.
Tighten the tow eye 6 fully: as much
as possible by hand at first, then finish
tightening it using the wheelbrace or,
depending on the vehicle, the lever.
Only use the towing eye 6 and the
wheelbrace 3 included in the tool kit
(please refer to the information under
“Tools” in Section 5).
When the engine is
stopped, steering and brak-
ing assistance are not op-
erational.
Do not leave the tools unse-
cured inside the vehicle as
they may come loose under
braking.
Use a rigid towing bar.
If a rope or cable is used
(where the law allows this),
the vehicle being towed
must be able to brake.
A vehicle must not be towed if it is
not fit to be driven.
Avoid accelerating or braking
suddenly when towing, as this
may result in damage being
caused to the vehicle.
In any case, it is advisable not to
exceed 16 mph (25 km/h).
Do not push the vehicle if the
steering column is locked.
6
3
4
5
6
8
7
3
5.34
OPERATING FAULTS (1/7)
The following advice will enable you to carry out quick, temporary repairs. For safety reasons you should always contact
an approved Dealer as soon as possible.
Using the RENAULT card POSSIBLE CAUSES WHAT TO DO
The RENAULT card does not lock or
unlock the doors.
Card battery is flat. Replace the battery. You can still lock/
unlock and start your vehicle (refer to the in-
formation on “Locking, unlocking the open-
ing elements” in Section 1 and “Starting,
stopping the engine” in Section 2).
Use of appliances operating on the
same frequency as the card (mobile
phone, etc.).
Stop using the equipment or use the in-
tegrated key (refer to the information on
“Locking, unlocking the opening elements”
in Section 1).
Vehicle located in a high electromag-
netic radiation zone.
Vehicle battery flat.
Use the key integrated in the card (refer to
the information on “Locking, unlocking the
opening elements” in Section 1).
The vehicle is started. With the engine running, the card’s locking/
unlocking device is blocked. Turn off the ig-
nition.
5.35
The following advice will enable you to carry out quick, temporary repairs. For safety reasons you should always contact
an approved dealer as soon as possible.
Using the remote control POSSIBLE CAUSES ACTION REQUIRED
The remote control does not lock or
unlock the doors.
The remote control battery is flat. Use the emergency key.
Use of appliances operating on the same
frequency as the remote control (mobile
phone, etc.).
Stop using the devices or use the key.
Vehicle located in a high electromagnetic
radiation zone.
Discharged battery.
Replace the battery. You can still lock/
unlock and start your vehicle (refer to the
information on “Locking/unlocking the
doors” in Section 1 and “Starting/Stopping
the engine” in Section 2).
The vehicle is started. With the engine running, the key’s locking/
unlocking device is blocked. Turn off the
ignition.
OPERATING FAULTS (2/7)
5.36
OPERATING FAULTS (3/7)
The starter is activated POSSIBLE CAUSES WHAT TO DO
The instrument panel indicator lights are
weak or fail to light up and the starter
does not turn.
Battery terminals not tight,
battery terminals discon-
nected or oxidised.
Retighten or reconnect the terminals, or clean them if
they are oxidised.
Discharged battery or not
operational.
Connect another battery to the faulty battery. Refer to
information on “Battery: troubleshooting” in Section 5
or replace the battery if necessary.
Do not push the vehicle if the steering column is
locked.
Faulty circuit. Consult an approved dealer.
The engine will not start. Starting conditions are not
fulfilled.
Please refer to the information on “Starting, stopping
the engine” in Section 2.
The RENAULT card does
not work.
Please refer to the information on “Starting, stopping
the engine” in Section 2.
The engine cannot be switched off. Card not detected. Please refer to the information on “Starting, stopping
the engine” in Section 2.
Electronic fault. Press the starter button quickly five times.
The steering column remains locked. Steering wheel locked. Move the steering wheel while pressing the engine
start button or, depending on the vehicle, while turning
the key (refer to the information on “Starting, stopping
the engine” in Section 2).
Faulty circuit. Consult an approved dealer.
5.37
OPERATING FAULTS (4/7)
On the road POSSIBLE CAUSES WHAT TO DO
Vibrations. Tyres not inflated to correct pres-
sures, incorrectly balanced or dam-
aged.
Check the tyre pressures: if this is not the
problem, have them checked by an ap-
proved Dealer.
White smoke from the exhaust. In the diesel version, this is necessar-
ily a fault. Smoke may be caused by
particle filter regeneration.
Refer to the information on “Special fea-
tures of diesel versions” in Section 2.
Smoke under the bonnet. Short-circuit or cooling system leak. Stop, switch off the ignition, stand away
from the vehicle and contact an approved
dealer.
The oil pressure warning light comes
on:
while cornering or braking The level is too low. Top up the engine oil level (refer to the in-
formation on “Engine oil level: topping up,
filling” in Section 4).
is slow to go out or remains lit
under acceleration
Loss of oil pressure. Stop the vehicle and contact an approved
Dealer.
5.38
OPERATING FAULTS (5/7)
On the road POSSIBLE CAUSES WHAT TO DO
Steering becomes heavy. Assistance overheating.
Fault with the electric assistance
motor.
Fault in the assistance system.
Drive carefully at reduced speed, be aware
of the level of force on the steering wheel
needed to turn the wheels. Consult an ap-
proved dealer.
The engine is overheating. The cool-
ant temperature indicator is in the
warning zone and warning light
® comes on.
Engine cooling fan not working. Stop the vehicle, switch off the engine and
contact an approved dealer.
Coolant leaks. Check the coolant reservoir: it should con-
tain fluid. If there is no coolant, consult an
approved dealer as soon as possible.
Coolant boiling in the coolant reser-
voir.
Mechanical fault: damaged cylinder
head gasket.
Stop the engine.
Contact an approved dealer.
Radiator: If there is a significant lack of coolant, remember that it must never be topped up using cold coolant while
the engine is very warm. After any procedure on the vehicle which has involved even partial draining of the cooling
system, it must be refilled with a new mixture prepared in the correct proportions. Reminder: only products approved
by our Technical Department may be used for this purpose.
5.39
OPERATING FAULTS (6/7)
Electrical equipment POSSIBLE CAUSES WHAT TO DO
The wipers do not work. Wiper blades stuck. Free the blades before using the wipers.
Faulty electrical circuit. Consult an approved dealer.
Fuse damaged. Replace the fuse or have it replaced; refer
to the information on “Fuses” in section 5.
The wiper does not stop. Faulty electrical controls. Consult an approved dealer.
Direction indicators flashing more
quickly.
Blown bulb. See information on “Headlights: changing
bulbs” or “Rear and side lights: changing
bulbs”.
The direction indicators do not work. Faulty electrical circuit or control. Consult an approved dealer.
Fuse damaged. Replace the fuse or have it replaced; refer
to the information on “Fuses” in section 5.
The lights do not come on or go off. Faulty electrical circuit or control. Consult an approved dealer.
Fuse damaged. Replace the fuse or have it replaced; refer
to the information on “Fuses” in section 5.
5.40
OPERATING FAULTS (7/7)
Electrical equipment POSSIBLE CAUSES WHAT TO DO
Traces of condensation in the head-
lights or rear lights.
Traces of condensation may be a nat-
ural phenomenon caused by varia-
tions in temperature and humidity.
In this case, the traces will disappear
slowly once the lights are switched
on.
The front seat belt reminder light
comes on when the seat belts are
fastened.
An object is stuck between the floor
and the seat and is disrupting the op-
eration of the sensor.
Remove all objects from underneath the
front seats.
6.1
Section 6: Technical specifications
Vehicle identification plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.2
Engine identification plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.3
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.4
Engine specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5
Engine specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.6
Towing weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.7
Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.7
Replacement parts and repairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.8
Service sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.9
Anticorrosion check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.15
6.2
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION PLATES
A
B
The information shown on the ve-
hicle identification plate should be
quoted on all correspondence or
orders.
The presence and location of the in-
formation depends on the vehicle.
Vehicle identification plate A
1 Manufacturer name.
2 EC design number or approval
number.
3 Identification number.
Depending on the vehicle, this
information is also given on
marking B.
4 MAM (Maximum Authorised
Mass).
5 GTW (Gross train weight: vehicle
fully loaded, with trailer).
6 MPAW (Maximim Permissible
Weight) for front axle.
7 MPAW on rear axle.
8 Reserved for related or additional
entries.
9 Not used.
10 Paint reference (colour code).
A
9
7
8
10
5
1
2
3
4
6
6.3
Please quote the information on the
engine plate or label A in all corre-
spondence or orders.
(Location varies depending on engine)
1 Engine type.
2 Engine suffix.
3 Engine number.
ENGINE IDENTIFICATION PLATES
A
A
A
21
3
A
A
6.4
1,607-1,621*
1,561
0,899 2,647 0,903
4,449
DIMENSIONS (in metres)
1,560
2,064
* Unladen, with or without longitudinal roof bar
6.5
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS (1/2)
Versions 1.2 Tce 1.6 Tce 1.5 dCi 1.6 dCi
Engine type
(see engine plate)
H5F Turbo M5M Turbo K9K R9M
Cubic capacity (cc) 1 197 1 618 1 461 1 598
Type of fuel
Octane rating
Petrol
It is essential that you use unleaded petrol of
the octane rating stated on the label inside the
fuel filler flap.
Refer to «Fuel tank» in Section 1.
Diesel
The label located in the fuel filler flap indicates
the authorised fuels.
Fuel types that meet
European standards and are
compatible with the engines
of vehicles sold in Europe
(in any other case, contact an
Approved Dealer).
Unleaded petrol compliant with
standard EN 228 contains up to
5 % ethanol in volume.
Diesel fuel compliant with
standard EN 590 contains up
to 7 % fatty acid methyl ester in
volume.
Unleaded petrol compliant with
standard EN 228 contains up to
10 % ethanol in volume.
Diesel fuel compliant with
standard EN 16734 contains up
to 10 % fatty acid methyl ester in
volume.
6.6
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS (2/2)
Versions 1.2 Tce 1.6 Tce 1.5 dCi 1.6 dCi
Engine type
(see engine plate)
H5F Turbo M5M Turbo K9K R9M
Cubic capacity (cc) 1 197 1 618 1 461 1 598
Spark plugs Only use the spark plugs specified for your vehi-
cle’s engine.
The type should be marked on a label affixed
inside the engine compartment. If it is not then
contact an approved Dealer.
Fitting spark plugs which are not to specification
may damage the engine.
6.7
WEIGHTS (in kg)
The weights indicated for a basic vehicle without options: they vary depending on the your vehicle’s equipment. Consult
your approved Dealer.
Maximum permissible all-up weight (MMAC)
Maximum permissible all-up weight (MMTA)
Gross Train Weight (MTR)
Weights are indicated on the vehicle identification plate (refer to
the information on “Vehicle identification plates” in Section 6)
Braked Trailer Weight* found by calculating: MTR - MMAC
Unbraked Trailer Weight* 690
Permissible nose weight* 75
Maximum permissible load on roof 75 kg (including carrying device)
* Towing weight (towing a caravan, boat, etc.)
Towing is prohibited when the MTR - MMAC calculation is equal to zero, or when the MTR is equal to zero (or is not listed) on
the identification plate.
It is important to comply with the towing weights, governed by local legislation in each country and, in particular, laid down in
the Road Traffic Regulations. Contact an approved Dealer about any towing equipment.
When towing, under no circumstances may the total train weight (vehicle + trailer) be exceeded. However the following is
permitted:
rear axle MMTA exceeded by no more than 15%,
maximum MMAC exceeded by no more than 10% or 100 kg (whichever is reached first).
In either case, the maximum speed of the vehicle and trailer must not exceed 60 mph (100 km/h) and the tyre pressures must
be increased by 0.2 bar (3 PSI).
– The engine output and climbing capability are reduced with altitude. We recommend that the maximum load be reduced by
10% at an altitude of 1,000 metres and by an additional 10% for each 1,000 metres thereafter.
6.8
Original parts are based on strict specifications and are subject to highly-specialised tests. Therefore, they are of at least the same
level of quality as the parts fitted originally.
If you always fit genuine replacement parts to your vehicle, you will ensure that it performs well. Furthermore, repairs carried out
within the manufacturer’s Network using original parts are guaranteed according to the conditions set out on the reverse of the
repair order.
REPLACEMENT PARTS AND REPAIRS
6.9
Date: Miles (Km): Invoice number: Comments/miscellaneous
Type of operation: Stamp
Service
.......................................
Anti-corrosion check:
OK Not OK*
*See specific page
Date: Miles (Km): Invoice number: Comments/miscellaneous
Type of operation: Stamp
Service
.......................................
Anti-corrosion check:
OK Not OK*
*See specific page
Date: Miles (Km): Invoice number: Comments/miscellaneous
Type of operation: Stamp
Service
.......................................
Anti-corrosion check:
OK Not OK*
*See specific page
VIN: ..................................................................................
SERVICE SHEETS (1/6)
6.10
SERVICE SHEETS (2/6)
VIN: ..................................................................................
Date: Miles (Km): Invoice number: Comments/miscellaneous
Type of operation: Stamp
Service
.......................................
Anti-corrosion check:
OK Not OK*
*See specific page
Date: Miles (Km): Invoice number: Comments/miscellaneous
Type of operation: Stamp
Service
.......................................
Anti-corrosion check:
OK Not OK*
*See specific page
Date: Miles (Km): Invoice number: Comments/miscellaneous
Type of operation: Stamp
Service
.......................................
Anti-corrosion check:
OK Not OK*
*See specific page
6.11
SERVICE SHEETS (3/6)
VIN: ..................................................................................
Date: Miles (Km): Invoice number: Comments/miscellaneous
Type of operation: Stamp
Service
.......................................
Anti-corrosion check:
OK Not OK*
*See specific page
Date: Miles (Km): Invoice number: Comments/miscellaneous
Type of operation: Stamp
Service
.......................................
Anti-corrosion check:
OK Not OK*
*See specific page
Date: Miles (Km): Invoice number: Comments/miscellaneous
Type of operation: Stamp
Service
.......................................
Anti-corrosion check:
OK Not OK*
*See specific page
6.12
SERVICE SHEETS (4/6)
VIN: ..................................................................................
Date: Miles (Km): Invoice number: Comments/miscellaneous
Type of operation: Stamp
Service
.......................................
Anti-corrosion check:
OK Not OK*
*See specific page
Date: Miles (Km): Invoice number: Comments/miscellaneous
Type of operation: Stamp
Service
.......................................
Anti-corrosion check:
OK Not OK*
*See specific page
Date: Miles (Km): Invoice number: Comments/miscellaneous
Type of operation: Stamp
Service
.......................................
Anti-corrosion check:
OK Not OK*
*See specific page
6.13
SERVICE SHEETS (5/6)
VIN: ..................................................................................
Date: Miles (Km): Invoice number: Comments/miscellaneous
Type of operation: Stamp
Service
.......................................
Anti-corrosion check:
OK Not OK*
*See specific page
Date: Miles (Km): Invoice number: Comments/miscellaneous
Type of operation: Stamp
Service
.......................................
Anti-corrosion check:
OK Not OK*
*See specific page
Date: Miles (Km): Invoice number: Comments/miscellaneous
Type of operation: Stamp
Service
.......................................
Anti-corrosion check:
OK Not OK*
*See specific page
6.14
VIN: ..................................................................................
Date: Miles (Km): Invoice number: Comments/miscellaneous
Type of operation: Stamp
Service
.......................................
Anti-corrosion check:
OK Not OK*
*See specific page
Date: Miles (Km): Invoice number: Comments/miscellaneous
Type of operation: Stamp
Service
.......................................
Anti-corrosion check:
OK Not OK*
*See specific page
Date: Miles (Km): Invoice number: Comments/miscellaneous
Type of operation: Stamp
Service
.......................................
Anti-corrosion check:
OK Not OK*
*See specific page
SERVICE SHEETS (6/6)
6.15
ANTICORROSION CHECK (1/6)
If the continuation of the warranty is subject to repair, it is indicated below.
VIN: ..........................................................
Corrosion repair operation to be carried
out:
Stamp
Date of repair:
Repair to be carried out:
Stamp
Date of repair:
Repair to be carried out:
Stamp
Date of repair:
6.16
ANTICORROSION CHECK (2/6)
If the continuation of the warranty is subject to repair, it is indicated below.
VIN: ..........................................................
Corrosion repair operation to be carried
out:
Stamp
Date of repair:
Repair to be carried out:
Stamp
Date of repair:
Repair to be carried out:
Stamp
Date of repair:
6.17
ANTICORROSION CHECK (3/6)
If the continuation of the warranty is subject to repair, it is indicated below.
VIN: ..........................................................
Corrosion repair operation to be carried
out:
Stamp
Date of repair:
Repair to be carried out:
Stamp
Date of repair:
Repair to be carried out:
Stamp
Date of repair:
6.18
ANTICORROSION CHECK (4/6)
If the continuation of the warranty is subject to repair, it is indicated below.
VIN: ..........................................................
Corrosion repair operation to be carried
out:
Stamp
Date of repair:
Repair to be carried out:
Stamp
Date of repair:
Repair to be carried out:
Stamp
Date of repair:
6.19
ANTICORROSION CHECK (5/6)
If the continuation of the warranty is subject to repair, it is indicated below.
VIN: ..........................................................
Corrosion repair operation to be carried
out:
Stamp
Date of repair:
Repair to be carried out:
Stamp
Date of repair:
Repair to be carried out:
Stamp
Date of repair:
6.20
ANTICORROSION CHECK (6/6)
If the continuation of the warranty is subject to repair, it is indicated below.
VIN: ..........................................................
Corrosion repair operation to be carried
out:
Stamp
Date of repair:
Repair to be carried out:
Stamp
Date of repair:
Repair to be carried out:
Stamp
Date of repair:
7.1
ALPHABETICAL INDEX (1/5)
A
ABS ..............................................................1.56, 2.30 2.39
accessories........................................................................ 5.29
accessories socket ............................................................ 3.25
additional methods of restraint .......................................... 1.33
side protection ............................................................. 1.32
to the front seat belts .......................................1.27 1.30
to the rear seat belts .................................................... 1.31
A
additive (reagent).................................................1.98 1.101
A
adjusting your driving position ..1.19 – 1.21, 1.23 1.26, 3.26
advice on antipollution ....................................................... 2.25
air bag...........................................................1.27 1.33, 1.54
activating the front passenger air bags ........................ 1.49
deactivating the front passenger air bags .................... 1.47
air conditioning ........................................................3.4 3.14
air vents ...................................................................... 3.2 – 3.3
anti-corrosion check ..............................................6.15 6.20
anti-corrosion protection .................................................... 4.15
anti-lock braking system: ABS ...............................2.30 2.39
antipollution
advice .......................................................................... 2.25
armrest:
front .............................................................................. 3.21
ashtray ............................................................................... 3.25
ASR (traction control) ............................................2.30 2.39
assisted parking.....................................................2.68 2.71
audible and visual signals.................................................. 1.84
automatic gearbox (use) ........................................2.72 2.74
automatic gearbox selector lever...........................2.72 2.74
B
battery................................................. 4.13 – 4.14, 5.27 – 5.28
troubleshooting ................................................. 5.27 – 5.28
battery (remote control) ..................................................... 5.23
blind spot warning signal .......................................2.47 2.50
blind spot: warning signal ......................................2.47 2.50
bonnet......................................................................... 4.2 – 4.3
brake fluid ............................................................................ 4.9
bulbs
changing ..........................................................5.14 5.21
C
catalytic converter..................................................2.12 2.14
central door locking .................1.2 – 1.3, 1.5, 1.8 1.15, 1.18
changing a bulb .....................................................5.14 5.21
changing a wheel...................................................... 5.9 – 5.10
changing gear ...............................................2.15, 2.72 2.74
child restraint/seat ....................1.34 – 1.35, 1.37 1.43, 1.47
child safety...............1.30, 1.34 – 1.35, 1.37 1.43, 1.47, 2.5,
3.16 – 3.17
child seats..........................................1.34 – 1.35, 1.37 1.43
children ........................................ 1.6, 1.34 – 1.35, 3.16 – 3.17
children (safety) ................................................................... 1.6
cigar lighter ........................................................................ 3.25
cleaning:
inside the vehicle .............................................. 4.18 – 4.19
clock .................................................................................. 1.75
closing the doors ...................................................1.13 1.18
control instruments .......................................1.54 1.63, 1.75
controls ..................................................................1.50 1.53
courtesy light ................................................. 3.18 – 3.19, 5.20
courtesy mirrors ................................................................. 3.20
cruise control ................................................1.57, 2.57 2.60
cruise control-speed limiter..............2.51 2.53, 2.57 2.60
customised vehicle settings ................................... 1.72 – 1.73
customising the vehicle settings ............................ 1.72 – 1.73
7.2
ALPHABETICAL INDEX (2/5)
D
dashboard..............................................................1.50 1.53
deadlocking the doors ................................................ 1.5, 1.12
demisting
rear screen .........................................................3.4 3.12
windscreen .........................................................3.4 3.12
dimensions .......................................................................... 6.4
dipstick................................................................................. 4.4
display ...................................................................1.54 1.61
doors/tailgate ....................................................1.4, 1.6 1.18
driver’s position .....................................................1.50 1.59
driving ......2.2 2.7, 2.12 2.14, 2.17 2.24, 2.30 2.43,
2.51 2.53, 2.57 2.65, 2.72 2.74
driving position
settings ............................................................1.23 1.26
driving recommendations ......................................2.20 2.24
E
ECO driving ...........................................................2.20 2.24
ECO mode ......................................................................... 2.21
electric beam height adjustment ............................. 1.85 – 1.86
electric windows ..................................................... 3.16 – 3.17
electronic parking brake ........................................2.17 2.19
electronic stability control: ESC .............................2.30 2.39
emergency active braking......................................2.35 2.39
emergency brake assist.........................................2.30 2.39
emergency braking ................................................2.30 2.39
emergency key ........................................................... 1.6 – 1.7
emergency spare wheel ............................................. 5.2 – 5.3
engine
technical specifications .................................. 6.5 – 6.6, 6.6
engine coolant ..................................................................... 4.8
engine oil ...................................................................4.4 4.7
engine oil capacity .....................................................4.5 4.7
engine oil level ...........................................................4.4 4.7
engine specifications .................................... 6.3, 6.5 – 6.6, 6.6
engine standby ........................................................2.8 2.11
engine start/stop button .............................................2.5 2.7
environment ....................................................................... 2.26
ESC: electronic stability control ....................1.56, 2.30 2.39
F
4 wheel drive (4WD) ..............................................2.40 2.43
faults
operating faults ................................................5.34 5.40
F
filling with reagent ................................................1.98 1.101
F
filter
air filter ......................................................................... 4.10
oil filter .................................................................4.5 4.7
particle filter ................................................................. 2.13
passenger compartment filter ...................................... 4.10
fittings ....................................................................
3.20 3.24
fixed sunroof ...................................................................... 3.17
front passenger air bag deactivation ................................. 1.47
front seat adjustment .............................................. 1.20 – 1.21
front seats
adjustment ............................................... 1.19 – 1.21, 1.23
with electric controls .................................................... 1.22
fuel
advice on fuel economy ...................................2.20 2.24
consumption ....................................................2.20 2.24
filling ........................................................1.54, 1.95 1.97
grade ................................................................1.95 1.97
fuel consumption ...................................................2.20 2.24
fuel economy .........................................................2.20 2.24
fuel filler cap ..........................................................1.95 1.97
fuel level ................................................................1.54 1.60
7.3
ALPHABETICAL INDEX (3/5)
fuel tank
capacity ........................................................................ 1.95
fuel tank capacity ...................................................1.95 1.97
fuses ......................................................................5.24 5.26
G
gear lever........................................................................... 2.15
grip control ......................................................................... 2.34
H
handbrake.......................................................................... 2.16
hands-free telephone integrated control ............................ 3.39
hazard warning lights signal .............................................. 1.84
headlight beam adjustment .................................... 1.85 – 1.86
headrest.................................................................... 1.19, 3.26
heated seats ...................................................................... 1.20
heated windscreen ..................................................3.7 3.12
heating and air conditioning system ........................3.4 3.13
heating system ........................................................3.4 3.12
Hill Start Assist.......................................................2.30 2.39
horn ................................................................................... 1.84
horn:
flash ............................................................................. 1.84
hubcap tool ................................................................. 5.7 – 5.8
I
ignition switch ...................................................................... 2.3
indicators ......................................................1.84, 5.14 5.19
indicators:
direction indicators ....................................................... 1.84
instrument panel ..............................................1.54 1.63
instrument panel ....................................................1.54 1.71
instrument panel messages...................................1.62 1.71
interior trim
maintenance ..................................................... 4.18 – 4.19
Isofix ....................................................................... 1.37 – 1.38
J
jack ...................................................................................... 5.7
K
keys ...........................................................................1.2 1.5
L
lane departure warning ..........................................2.44 2.46
levels .......................................................................4.8 4.10
levels:
brake fluid ...................................................................... 4.9
coolant ........................................................................... 4.8
windscreen washer reservoir ....................................... 4.10
lifting the vehicle
changing a wheel ................................................ 5.9 – 5.10
lighting:
exterior .............................................................1.78 1.86
instrument panel .......................................................... 1.78
interior ........................................... 3.18 – 3.19, 5.20 – 5.21
lights
adjustment ........................................................ 1.85 – 1.86
changing bulbs .................................................5.14 5.16
front ..................................................................5.14 5.16
lights:
adjusting ........................................................... 1.85 – 1.86
brake lights ......................................................5.17 5.19
dipped beam headlights .................1.54, 1.78, 5.14 5.16
direction indicators .........................1.54, 1.84, 5.14 5.17
fog lights .................................................... 1.54, 1.81, 5.19
hazard warning ............................................................ 1.84
main beam headlights ....................1.54, 1.78, 5.14 5.16
reversing lights ............................................................. 5.19
side lights ................................................1.78, 5.14 5.17
load permitted on the roof.................................................... 6.7
locking the doors ..............................................1.4, 1.6 1.18
luggage compartment cover .............................................. 3.30
7.4
ALPHABETICAL INDEX (4/5)
luggage retaining net .............................................. 3.35 – 3.36
M
maintenance ...................................................................... 2.25
maintenance:
bodywork .........................................................4.15 4.17
interior trim ........................................................ 4.18 – 4.19
mechanical ..............................4.4, 4.13 – 4.14, 6.9 6.14
map reading lights .................................................. 3.18 – 3.19
menu for customising the vehicle settings .............. 1.72 – 1.73
methods of restraint in addition to the seat belts ...1.27 1.33
mobile floor ........................................................................ 3.31
multimedia equipment ....................................................... 3.39
N
navigation system .............................................................. 3.39
O
oil change ..................................................................4.5 4.7
opening the doors ..................................................1.13 1.17
operating faults ................................1.54 1.59, 5.34 5.40
overspeed warning ................................................2.54 2.56
P
paintwork
maintenance ....................................................4.15 4.17
parking assistance: assisted parking .....................2.68 2.71
parking distance control.........................................2.61 2.65
power-assisted steering..................................................... 1.74
pretensioners .........................................................1.27 1.30
puncture............................................. 5.2 – 5.3, 5.7, 5.9 – 5.10
R
radio................................................................................... 3.39
radio frequency remote control/key
use .......................................................................1.2 1.4
R
reagent (tank) ......................................................1.98 1.101
reagent quality .....................................................1.98 1.101
reagent tank.........................................................1.98 1.101
reagent tank cap ..................................................1.98 1.101
reagent tank capacity ..........................................1.98 1.101
R
rear bench seat....................................................... 3.27 – 3.28
rear parcel shelf ................................................................. 3.30
rear seats........................................................................... 1.25
functions ........................................................... 3.27 – 3.28
rear view mirrors ..................................................... 1.76 – 1.77
remote control door locking
batteries ....................................................................... 5.23
remote control door locking unit ................................1.2 1.4
RENAULT ANTI-INTRUDER DEVICE (RAID) ................... 1.18
RENAULT card
battery .......................................................................... 5.22
use ...................................................1.6 1.12, 2.5 2.7
RENAULT card battery ...................................................... 5.22
replacement parts ................................................................ 6.8
reverse gear
selecting ..................................................2.15, 2.72 2.74
reversing sensor ....................................................2.61 2.65
roof bars ................................................................. 3.37 – 3.38
roof rack
roof bars ............................................................ 3.37 – 3.38
running in .................................................................... 2.2 – 2.3
S
SCR: selective catalytic reduction .......................1.98 1.101
seat belt pretensioners
front seat belt ...................................................1.27 1.30
seat belts ......................................................1.23
1.30, 1.33
service sheets..........................................................6.9
6.14
7.5
ALPHABETICAL INDEX (5/5)
side protection devices ...................................................... 1.32
sign detection: overspeed warning ........................2.54 2.56
signals and lights ...................................................1.78 1.86
special features of diesel versions..................................... 2.14
special features of petrol vehicles .......................... 2.12 – 2.13
speed limiter .................................................1.57, 2.51 2.53
spoiler ................................................................................ 3.38
starting the engine ...................................................2.3 2.11
steering wheel
adjustment ................................................................... 1.74
Stop & Start ....................................................1.57, 2.8 2.11
Stop & Start function................................................2.8 2.11
stopping the engine ...................................................2.4 2.7
storage compartment.............................................3.20 3.24
storage compartments ...........................................3.20 3.24
sun visor ............................................................................ 3.20
switching on the vehicle ignition .........................2.3, 2.5 2.7
T
tailgate ..........................................................3.29, 3.31 3.33
tanks and reservoirs
brake fluid ...................................................................... 4.9
coolant ........................................................................... 4.8
tanks and reservoirs:
windscreen washer ...................................................... 4.10
technical specifications ..............................................6.4 6.8
telephone ........................................................................... 3.39
temperature regulation ............................................3.7 3.12
tool kit .................................................................................. 5.7
towing
breakdown ........................................................ 5.32 – 5.33
towing equipment ......................................................... 3.34
towing a caravan ........................................................ 3.34, 6.7
towing equipment
fitting ............................................................................ 3.34
towing hitch...................................................... 5.7, 5.32 – 5.33
towing rings .............................................................. 3.33, 3.36
towing weights ..................................................................... 6.7
traction control: ASR ..............................................2.30 2.39
transporting children .................1.34 – 1.35, 1.37 1.43, 1.47
transporting objects
in the luggage compartment ........................................ 3.33
luggage net ....................................................... 3.35 – 3.36
on the roof ...................................................................... 6.7
trims ..................................................................................... 5.8
trip computer and warning system...1.54 1.59, 1.62 1.71
tyre inflation kit...........................................................5.4 5.6
tyre pressure.............................2.27 2.29, 4.11 – 4.12, 5.12
tyre pressure monitor.............................................2.27 2.29
tyre pressures ......................................................... 4.11 – 4.12
tyres .................... 2.23, 2.27 2.29, 4.11 – 4.12, 5.11 5.13
U
unlocking the doors ...............................................1.13 1.15
V
variable power-assisted steering ....................................... 1.74
vehicle identification plates ......................................... 6.2 – 6.3
ventilation ................................................................3.2 3.12
W
warning lights.........................................................1.54 1.71
washing .................................................................4.15 4.17
weights ................................................................................ 6.7
wheelbrace .......................................................................... 5.7
wheels (safety) ......................................................5.11 5.13
windscreen de-icing/demisting ................................3.7
3.12
windscreen washer ................................................1.87
1.94
wiper blades ........................................................... 5.30 – 5.31
wipers ....................................................................1.87 1.94
blades ............................................................... 5.30 – 5.31
A passion
for
performance
ELF, partner of
RENAULT recommends ELF
Partners in cutting-edge automotive technology, Elf and Renault combine their expertise on both
the racetrack and the city streets. This enduring partnership gives drivers a range of lubricants
perfectly suited to Renault cars. Lasting protection and optimum performance for your engine –
guaranteed. Whether changing the oil or simply topping up, to find the approved ELF lubricant
best suited to your vehicle, ask your Renault dealer for a recommendation or consult your vehi-
cle maintenance handbook.
www.lubricants.elf.com
A brand from
2016-Elf-ENG.indd 1 18/05/2016 14:20
RENAULT S.A.S. SOCIÉTÉ PAR ACTIONS SIMPLIFIÉE AU CAPITAL DE 533 941 113 € / 13-15, QUAI LE GALLO
92100 BOULOGNE-BILLANCOURT R.C.S. NANTERRE 780 129 987 — SIRET 780 129 987 03591 / TÉL. : 0810 40 50 60
NU 1161-7 – 99 91 086 96S – 02/2018 – Edition anglaise
à999108696Sêëóä SN
110


Need help? Post your question in this forum.

Forumrules


Report abuse

Libble takes abuse of its services very seriously. We're committed to dealing with such abuse according to the laws in your country of residence. When you submit a report, we'll investigate it and take the appropriate action. We'll get back to you only if we require additional details or have more information to share.

Product:

For example, Anti-Semitic content, racist content, or material that could result in a violent physical act.

For example, a credit card number, a personal identification number, or an unlisted home address. Note that email addresses and full names are not considered private information.

Forumrules

To achieve meaningful questions, we apply the following rules:

Register

Register getting emails for Renault Kadjar - 2018 at:


You will receive an email to register for one or both of the options.


Get your user manual by e-mail

Enter your email address to receive the manual of Renault Kadjar - 2018 in the language / languages: English as an attachment in your email.

The manual is 8,76 mb in size.

 

You will receive the manual in your email within minutes. If you have not received an email, then probably have entered the wrong email address or your mailbox is too full. In addition, it may be that your ISP may have a maximum size for emails to receive.

Others manual(s) of Renault Kadjar - 2018

Renault Kadjar - 2018 User Manual - German - 310 pages

Renault Kadjar - 2018 User Manual - Dutch - 310 pages


The manual is sent by email. Check your email

If you have not received an email with the manual within fifteen minutes, it may be that you have a entered a wrong email address or that your ISP has set a maximum size to receive email that is smaller than the size of the manual.

The email address you have provided is not correct.

Please check the email address and correct it.

Your question is posted on this page

Would you like to receive an email when new answers and questions are posted? Please enter your email address.



Info